Yamaha CVP-409PE El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-409PE

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

CVP-409 / 407

OWNER’S MANUAL

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the

end of this manual.

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas

a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the

voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change

the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CVP-409GP

(grand piano type)

CVP-409/407

92-469

(bottom)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-13

1/2

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, gently remove dust and dirt with a

soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the

instrument's ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping

cloths.

• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur

and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the

wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any

water off immediately with a soft cloth.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, bumping the surface of the

instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to

crack or peel. Use caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• (CVP-409 including grand piano type) Do not attempt to adjust the bench height

while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed

on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism

or even injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the

instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 26), USB storage

device (USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

• Recorded/Edited Songs (page 42, 143, 158)

• Created/Edited Styles (page 117)

• Edited Voices (page 99)

• Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51)

• Edited MIDI settings (page 196)

Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 76.

Data in the USER tab display (page 26) may be lost due to malfunction or

incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB ﬂash

memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page,

System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List

booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off

the power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(1)B-13

2/2

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of the following sections.

Owner’s Manual

Introduction (page 10).......................... Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 23)......................... This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 63).................... This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-

based controls.

Reference (page 78) ............................. This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s

various functions.

Appendix (page 205)............................ This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and

Speciﬁcations.

Data List

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

•The models CVP-409/407 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

•The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

•The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except

for your personal use.

•This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the

device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

•The photos of the harpsichord, bandoneon, hackbrett, music box, dulcimer and cimbalom, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are

courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy), Kunitachi College of Music.

•The following instruments, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments:

balafon, gender, kalimba, kanoon, santur, gamelan gong, harp, hand bell, bagpipe, banjo, carillon, mandolin, oud, pan ﬂute, pungi, rabab,

shanai, sitar, steel drum, and tambra.

•This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from IVL Audio

Inc.

•The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed

from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF

may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.

This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

Trademarks:

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or

with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without lim-

itation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any

unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws.

Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Accessories

Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration

“50 greats for the Piano” Music Book

Owner’s Manual

Data List

The following items may be included or optional, depending on your locale:

Bench

■

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

■

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the

unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you ﬁrst took it out

of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side.

Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock.

When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been

loosened by moving the instrument.

After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function

(page 82).

• Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall. (This is not necessary for the

CVP-409 grand piano type.)

• (When using the SPATIAL EFFECT) Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 83).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Various display pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument, indicating the functions and opera-

tions. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up

these functions. The example shorthand below describes a four step operation:

1) press the [FUNCTION] button, 2) press the [D] button to select the Controller page, 3) press the TAB [

] button to

select the Keyboard/Panel page, and 4) press the [A] button to select the Initial Touch parameter.

[FUNCTION]

→

[D] CONTROLLER

→

TAB [

] KEYBOARD/PANEL

→

[A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

Table of Contents

Introduction

Enhanced Realism and Natural

Expressiveness ................................................. 10

Panel Controls ................................................. 12

Playing the Keyboard ...................................... 14

Setting Up ....................................................... 16

Music Rest ................................................... 16

Sheet Music Braces ...................................... 16

Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type) ................... 16

Using Headphones ....................................... 17

Changing the Display Language .................. 18

Display Settings ........................................... 18

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks .................................................... 21

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash

Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) .............................. 22

Quick Guide .......................23

Playing the Demos .......................................... 23

Operations in the Basic Displays ..................... 25

Operation of the Main Display ............................. 25

Operation of the File Selection Display ................. 26

Operation of the Function Display ........................ 27

Playing Voices ................................................. 28

Playing the Piano Voice ........................................ 28

Playing Various Voices .......................................... 32

Practicing with the Songs ............................... 35

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing .................... 35

Displaying Music Notation (Score) ....................... 38

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ......... 39

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ....... 41

Recording Your Performance ................................ 42

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology ....................................... 43

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 44

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 45

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song

—Music Finder ................................................ 52

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style

(Repertoire) .......................................................... 53

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke)

or Your Own Performance .............................. 54

Connecting a Microphone ................................... 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ............................. 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................ 56

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance ................................................ 58

Recording Your Performance as Audio

(USB Audio Recorder) ..................................... 60

Recording Your Performance as Audio .................. 60

Playing Back the Recorded Performance ............... 62

Basic Operation

Basic Operation ................................63

Selecting Message Language .......................... 63

The Messages Shown in the Display .............. 63

Instant Selection of the Displays

—Direct Access ................................................ 64

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection

Display) ............................................................ 65

Main Display ........................................................ 65

File Selection Display Configuration and Basic

Operation ............................................................. 66

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display

... 68

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

... 74

Restoring the Factory-programmed System .......... 74

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item ......................................... 75

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a

Single File ............................................................. 75

Data Backup .................................................... 76

Backup procedure ................................................ 77

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..78

Voice Characteristics ....................................... 78

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ........ 79

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) .................. 79

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

(Right 1 and 2 Parts) ............................................ 80

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right

Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) .............................. 81

Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound

(iAFC) ............................................................... 82

Adjusting the iAFC Depth ..................................... 82

Calibrating the iAFC Settings ................................ 83

Restoring the Default Calibration Setting

[iAFC Default] ....................................................... 84

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Changing Pitch ................................................ 84

Transpose ............................................................. 84

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 84

Scale Tuning ........................................................ 84

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the

Keyboard ......................................................... 86

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE) ....................................... 88

Basic Procedure .................................................... 88

Voice Creating (Sound Creator) ..................... 99

Basic Procedure .................................................... 99

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ........ 103

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto

Accompaniment Styles ...................107

Style Characteristics ...................................... 107

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ................ 107

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a

Style ............................................................... 108

Style Playback-related Settings ..................... 109

Split Point Settings ....................................... 111

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the

Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ............................ 112

Convenient Music Finder feature ................. 112

Searching the Records ........................................ 112

Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...................... 114

Editing Records .................................................. 114

Saving the Record .............................................. 115

Style Creator ................................................. 117

Style Structure .................................................... 117

Creating a Style .................................................. 118

Editing the Created Style .................................... 123

Registering and Recalling Custom

Panel Setups

—Registration Memory ..................131

Registering and Saving Custom Panel

Setups ............................................................ 131

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ......... 132

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup ........................................................ 133

Disabling Recall of Specific Items

(Freeze Function) ............................................... 133

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order

—Registration Sequence .................................... 134

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

...136

Compatible Song Types ................................ 136

Operations for Song Playback ...................... 137

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice

Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ....... 140

Using the Practice Function (Guide) ............ 141

Selecting the Guide Function Type ..................... 141

Recording Your Performance ....................... 143

Recording Methods ............................................ 143

Editing a Recorded Song .................................... 158

Using a Microphone .......................167

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters .............. 167

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony

Sound ............................................................ 170

Talk Setting ................................................... 174

Connecting the Clavinova Directly

to the Internet ...............................176

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet

.. 176

Accessing the Special Website ...................... 177

Operations in the Special Website ............... 177

Scrolling the Display ........................................... 177

Following Links ................................................... 178

Entering Characters ............................................ 178

Return to the Previous Web Page ........................ 178

Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a

Web Page ........................................................... 179

Purchasing and Downloading Data .................... 180

Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages .... 180

About the Internet Settings Display .................... 183

Changing the Home Page .................................. 186

Initializing Internet Settings ................................ 187

Glossary of Internet Terms ........................... 188

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices ............................................189

Using Headphones (1

[PHONES] jacks) ...... 189

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar

[MIC./LINE IN] jack) ................................ 189

Connecting Audio & Video Devices

(345

) .. 189

Using External Audio Devices for playback and

Recording (3

[AUX OUT] Jacks, [AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks) .......................................... 189

Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in

Speakers (4

[AUX IN] Jacks) ............................... 190

Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on an

External Monitor

[VIDEO OUT] Terminal, [RGB OUT] Terminal

) .. 190

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller

[AUX PEDAL] jack) ................................... 191

Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal

... 191

Connecting External MIDI Devices

[MIDI] Terminals) .................................... 194

Connecting a Computer, USB Device,

or Internet (789)

) ................................... 194

Connecting a Computer

[MIDI] and 8

[USB TO HOST] Terminals) ..... 194

Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB

Storage Device

via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) ............... 195

Connect to the Internet ()

[LAN] Port) .............. 196

What is MIDI? ................................................ 196

What You Can Do With MIDI ....................... 199

MIDI Settings ................................................ 200

Basic Operation .................................................. 200

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ....................... 201

MIDI System Settings ......................................... 202

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using

Your

Instrument

with

Other

Devices

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operation

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto

Accompaniment Styles

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Using a Microphone

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the

Internet

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices

Appendix

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

MIDI Transmit Settings ....................................... 202

MIDI Receive Settings......................................... 203

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 203

Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 204

Appendix

Troubleshooting ............................................ 205

CVP-409 grand piano type: Keyboard Stand

Assembly ....................................................... 210

CVP-409/407: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..... 213

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) .. 216

Specifications ................................................ 217

Index .............................................................. 219

Panel Button Chart ....................................... 222

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness

Authentic Acoustic Piano-like Touch

NW (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (CVP-409 including grand

piano type)

This is the ﬁrst Clavinova featuring a keyboard that has the feel of real ivory. The special

Natural Wood keyboard of the CVP-409 uses real-wood white keys. The key surface is

soft and slightly porous, giving the keys added grip and a natural friction that lets you play

easily. The authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic key-

boards, it makes you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. This specially crafted key-

board lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos, such as playing the same

note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper

pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound

cutting off unnaturally.

NW (Natural Wood) Keyboard (CVP-407)

The special Natural Wood keyboard of the CVP-407 uses real-wood white keys, to repro-

duce as closely as possible the experience of playing an actual acoustic grand piano. The

authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards, realis-

tically recreating the hardness of the keys, the balance between the weight of the key and

hammer, and the characteristic weight gradations of the keys – heavy in the low end, light

in the high register – to make you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. Moreover,

this specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos,

such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even

without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect

articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally.

Turn on the iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect, and hear the sound expand

around you—as if you’re playing on stage in a concert hall. Use the Spatial Effect to rec-

reate and emphasize the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments. The overall sound

is deeper and more resonant, especially when using the damper pedal (Dynamic

Damper Effect).

The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano

—with the iAFC Feature

SPATIAL Effect (greater depth) DYNAMIC DAMPER EffectSPATIAL Effect (less depth)

The Spatial Effect, which recreates the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments, is not

applied to the default setting. For more details about iAFC, see page 82.

Audio Recording

Recording Your Performance as Audio......................................page 60

You can record your performance as audio data to a USB ﬂash memory. Con-

nect a microphone or guitar to the instrument and enjoy recording a guitar

and keyboard performance together, or record your singing along with Song

playback (in karaoke fashion).

Introduction

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Perform Along with a Full Band

—Song Playback.........................................................................page 35

Play along with previously recorded Song data, and ﬁll out your solo perfor-

mance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra.

Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs,

—performance assistant technology.........................................page 43

The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally

easy to play professional-sounding backing parts along with Song playback.

Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment,

—Style Playback .........................................................................page 44

Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and

accompaniment, while you play melodies on top. It’s like having an expert ensemble

playing behind you. Select an accompaniment Style—such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc.—

and let the instrument be your backing band!

Playing the Instrument

Playing Piano Voices ................................................................ page 28

With just the press of a button, you can reconﬁgure the entire instrument for

optimum piano performance, no matter what settings you’ve made from the

panel. Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand

piano sounds and response—instantly.

Playing Other Instrument Voices ..............................................page 32

The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices, but also features an

exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments, both acoustic and electronic.

Practicing

Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ................page 59

While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation) automati-

cally shown on the display—an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and

practicing pieces.

Guide Lamps...............................................................................page 39

The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing, since they

indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long

you should hold them down.

Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42

The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to inter-

nal memory or a USB storage device. This, too, is an excellent practice tool, let-

ting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points.

Expand Your Song Collection

Internet Direct Connection......................................................page 176

The instrument also connects directly to the Internet, letting you download Song data

from special websites, and save them to internal memory or a USB storage device.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Panel Controls

1 [POWER] switch .............................................................. P. 14

2 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal.............................................. P. 22

3 [MASTER VOLUME] dial.................................................. P. 15

4 [DEMO] button................................................................ P. 23

METRONOME

5 [ON/OFF] button ............................................................. P. 30

TRANSPOSE

6 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 56

TEMPO

7 [TAP TEMPO] button........................................................ P. 47

8 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 31

STYLE CONTROL

9 STYLE category selection buttons..................................... P. 45

0 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .................................................. P. 46

A [AUTO FILL IN] button .................................................... P. 48

B INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ................................................ P. 47

C MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons ....................... P. 48

D [BREAK] button................................................................ P. 48

E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ........................................ P. 48

F [SYNC STOP] button........................................................ P. 48

G [SYNC START] button ...................................................... P. 47

H [START/STOP] button....................................................... P. 47

I [MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................. P. 52

J [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................. P. 18

K [A]–[J] buttons.................................................................. P. 25

L [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................. P. 64

M [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................ P. 88

N [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ................................. P. 109, 143

O [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons ................................................ P. 25

P TAB [

√

][

] buttons......................................................... P. 26

Q [EXIT] button.................................................................... P. 26

R [DATA ENTRY] dial .......................................................... P. 67

S [ENTER] button ................................................................ P. 67

T [USB] button .................................................................... P. 67

U [USER] button .................................................................. P. 67

PART ON/OFF

V [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button ................................................. P. 79

W [SPLIT (LEFT)] button........................................................ P. 79

X [FUNCTION] button ........................................................ P. 27

Y [INTERNET] button ........................................................ P. 176

SONG CONTROL

Z [SONG SELECT] button.................................................... P. 35

[ [REC] button .................................................................... P. 42

\ [STOP] button .................................................................. P. 35

] [PLAY/PAUSE] button ....................................................... P. 35

^ [REW]/[FF] buttons......................................................... P. 138

a [EXTRA TRACKS] button................................................. P. 144

b [TRACK 2 (L)] button ........................................................ P. 41

c [TRACK 1 (R)] button........................................................ P. 39

d [SCORE] button................................................................ P. 38

e [LYRICS/TEXT] button....................................................... P. 55

f [GUIDE] button................................................................ P. 39

g [REPEAT] button ............................................................... P. 41

PIANO Setting

h [PIANO RESET] button ..................................................... P. 29

REGISTRATION MEMORY

i REGIST BANK [+] [–] buttons ......................................... P. 132

j [MEMORY] button .........................................................P. 131

k [1]–[8] buttons ............................................................... P. 131

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

VOICE CONTROL

l VOICE category selection buttons .................................... P. 32

m [VOICE EFFECT] button ................................................... P. 86

ONE TOUCH SETTING

n [1]–[4] buttons................................................................. P. 50

o [OTS LINK] button ........................................................... P. 51

p Drum Kit icons................ Data List (Drum/key Assignment List)

Pedals

q Left pedal......................................................................... P. 30

r Sostenuto pedal ............................................................... P. 30

s Damper pedal.................................................................. P. 30

t Keyboard guide lamps ..................................................... P. 39

u Mic signal/over lamps...................................................... P. 54

For quick reference, also see the alphabetically

sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 222.

For information on the jacks and connectors located

on the bottom left of the instrument, see page 189.

The [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is also located on the

bottom left of the instrument.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Playing the Keyboard

Connecting the power cable

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the instru-

ment, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the

wall.

Opening the key cover

Using the hand grip on the front, lift open the key cover.

Turning the power on

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the

power on. The display located in the center of the front panel and the power

indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both

hands when opening or clos-

ing it. Do not release it until it

is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁn-

gers (yours or others, espe-

cially children’s) between the

cover and the unit.

CAUTION

Do not place objects such as a

piece of metal or paper on

top of the key cover. Small

objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit

when the cover is opened and

may be nearly impossible to

remove. This could cause elec-

tric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or

other serious damage to the

instrument.

(The shape of the plug and outlet dif-

fer depending on locale.)

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers

when opening the cover.

The power indicator

lights up.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

4 Playing the keyboard

Play the keyboard to produce sound.

Adjusting the volume

While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER

VOLUME] located at the left of the panel.

5 Turning the power off

Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power off.

The screen and the power indicator turn off.

6 Closing the key cover

Grip the metal rim at the top of the panel, and close the key cover.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers

when closing the cover.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Setting Up

Music Rest

To Raise the Music Rest:

CVP-409 grand piano type

1 Pull the music rest up and toward

yourself as far as it will go.

2 Flip down the two metal supports at

the left and the right on the rear of the

music rest.

3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on

the metal supports.

CVP-409/407

Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

When raised, the music rest is ﬁxed at a certain

angle and cannot be adjusted.

To Lower the Music Rest:

CVP-409 grand piano type

1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as

far as it will go.

2 Raise the two metal supports until

they are ﬂat against the rear surface of

the music rest.

3 Gently lower the music rest backward

until it is all the way down.

CVP-409/407

Lift the music rest slightly, then turn it

back slowly.

Sheet Music Braces

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

To Open To Close

Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type)

One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to open

the lid to the desired angle.

■ To open the lid:

1 Raise the music rest as described in

“Music Rest” above.

2 Raise and hold the right side of the lid

(viewed from the keyboard end of the

instrument).

3 Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the

lid so that the end of the stay ﬁts into the

recess in the lid.

CAUTION

When raising or lowering the

music rest, do not release

our hands from the music

rest until it is all the way up or

down.

CAUTION

Before lowering the music

rest, close the sheet music

braces (see below).

The music rest will not close

unless the sheet music braces

are also closed.

To turn on the iAFC (page 82),

open the lid with the longer

stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open

with the shorter stay, the iAFC

will not be turned on.

CVP-409 grand

piano type

CVP-409/407

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid

catching your ﬁngers.

Close the sheet

music braces

CVP-409/407

CVP-409 grand

piano type

Using Headphones

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

For the longer stay, use the inner recess, and for the shorter stay, use the outer

recess to support the lid.

■ To close the lid:

1 Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the

lid.

2 Hold the lid in its raised position and

lower the lid stay.

3 Carefully lower the lid.

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the

[PHONES] jacks located on the bottom left

of the instrument.

Two sets of standard stereo headphones

can be connected. (If you are using only

one pair of headphones, you can plug

them into either of these jacks.)

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the instrument

package so that you can hang the headphones on the

instrument. Install the headphone hanger using

included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

Longer stay Shorter stay

CAUTION

•Make sure that the end of

the stay ﬁts securely in the

lid recess. If the stay is not

properly seated in the

recess, the lid may fall, caus-

ing damage or injury.

• Be careful that you or oth-

ers do not bump the stay

while the lid is raised. The

stay may be bumped out of

the lid recess causing the lid

to fall.

• Be careful to avoid catching

ﬁngers (yours or others,

especially children’s) when

raising or lowering the lid.

MIN MAX

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

CAUTION

Do not listen with the head-

phones at high volume for

long periods of time. Doing

so may cause hearing loss.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other

than the headphones on the

hanger. Otherwise, the instru-

ment or the hanger may be

damaged.

Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are con-

nected

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]→ [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] (SPEAKER) button to select “ON.”

Outputting sound only from the headphones

From the display called up in step 1 above, press the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

]

(SPEAKER) button to select “OFF.”

When “OFF” is selected, the speakers will not sound and you can only hear

the instrument sound via the headphones.

Changing the Display Language

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Changing the Display Language

This determines the language used in the display for messages, ﬁle names, and

character input.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select a language.

To return to the original display,

press the [EXIT] button.

Display Settings

Adjusting the Contrast of the Display

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob

located to the left of the display.

Display Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

Adjust the brightness of the display.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

] button to adjust the brightness of the display.

Selecting a Picture for the Main Display Back-

ground

This function lets you select your favorite picture to be used as background for the

Main display (page 25).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [J] (MAIN PICTURE) button to call up the Picture Selection

Display.

3 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a picture.

Display Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

After selecting, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then press the [EXIT] button to

return to the Main display. The newly selected picture is shown as the background

of the Main display.

Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display

You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that ﬁrst

appears when the power is turned on).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display.

Refer to page 73 for character-entry details.

The explanation about picture

compatibility at right applies

also to the background of the

Song Lyrics display.

Importing a favorite picture for the Main display background

Even though a variety of pictures are available on the Preset drive, you can

load your own favorite picture data from USB storage device (USB ﬂash

memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc) to the instrument for use as background.

Make sure to use images no larger than 640 x 480 pixels.

If you select a picture ﬁle on the USB storage device (USB ﬂash memory/

ﬂoppy disk, etc), the background may take some time to appear. If you want

to reduce this time, save the background from the USB drive to the USER

drive of the Picture Selection display.

If you select a picture ﬁle on the USB drive, the selected background will

not be displayed when the power is turned on again unless the same media

containing the data has been inserted into the drive.

Displaying the version number

To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

]

(VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT] button to

return to the original display.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

(The ﬂoppy disk drive is optional. For instructions

on installing the ﬂoppy disk drive, see page 216.)

The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve cre-

ated on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you to

load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Formatting a Floppy Disk

• If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank disks or

old disks that have been used with other devices, you

may need to format them. For details on how to format a

disk, see page 68. Keep in mind that all data on the disk

will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check before-

hand whether or not the disk contains important data.

Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable

as is on other devices.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards

the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly

pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the

eject button pops out.

Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive. Other

objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Removing a Floppy Disk

• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the

ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy

disk drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at the

upper right of the disk slot all the way in.

When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If

the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck,

do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject

button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to

eject it again.

* Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data.

If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is

automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether

the disk has data.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventu-

ally cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper headcleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and fol-

low these precautions:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous-

ing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab

open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-

protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed).

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument

itself while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk

but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

Write-protect tab open

(protect position)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] termi-

nal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be

sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the

important precautions below.

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to

the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive,

hard disk drive, etc.)

• USB hub

• USB-LAN adaptor

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument,

please visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the

device is appropriate and that it is connected in the

proper direction.

• If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same

time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device.

The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power

source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub

can be used. If an error message appears while using the

USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then

turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the

USB hub.

•Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to

the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

The number of USB storage device to be

used

Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub.

The number of USB storage devices that can be used

simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB

hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can rec-

ognize up to four drives in one USB storage device.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation

(page 68).

Protecting your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage

device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure

that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the

Save, Copy and Delete operations).

CAUTION

When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the

key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device

connected, the USB device may be damaged.

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does

not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe-

cially when connecting multiple USB storage media.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB

storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device

too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the

instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instru-

ment is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete,

Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB

storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT

unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media

from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either

device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both

devices.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos

The Demos are more than just songs—they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the

features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-man-

ual”—complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J]UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons

to select the desired language.

Demos will play back continuously until

stopped.

When the Demo stops, the display returns

to the MAIN display (page 65).

1 Select the desired Language.

2 Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Showing Speciﬁc Demo Topics

To return back to the previous display,

press the [J] button.

When the Demo has more than

one screen.

Press a [

π†

] button corresponding

to the screen number.

1 Press the [7ππ

ππ

††

]/[8ππ

ππ

††

] buttons in the Demo display to call up the speciﬁc Demo menu.

2 Press one of the [A]–[I] buttons to show a speciﬁc Demo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from Demo.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Operations in the Basic Displays

To start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are

three basic displays:

Main display ➤ See below.

File selection display ➤ page 26

Function display ➤ page 27

Operation of the Main Display

The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that

appears when the instrument is turned on.).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from

the Main display.

n About information in the Main display

See page 65.

1 [A]–[J] buttons

The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings

indicated next to the buttons.

For example, press the [F] button, and the

Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear

in the display.

2 [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons

The [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons correspond to

the parameters which are indicated above the

buttons.

For example, pressing the [1

] button will

increase the Song (page 35) volume.

3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons

Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main

display from any other display: Simply press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

1 1

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the File Selection Display

In the File Selection display, you can select the Voice (page 28)/Song (page 35)/Style (page 44), etc.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display.

About PRESET/USER/USB

PRESET .............. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data.

USER ................. Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data.

USB ...................USB storage device, such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk drive, etc., which is connected

to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

n Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB

storage device.”

Several Songs may be together in a

folder. In this case, the folder(s) will

appear in the display (see the illustration

at right). Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons

to select a folder.

Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up

the next highest level folder.

When the drive contains more than ten Songs, the display is divided up into several pages. The page indica-

tions are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [1

]–[6

] buttons to select a page.

You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/USB).

3 Select a folder (if necessary).

4 Select a page (if the display has several pages).

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the Function Display

In the Function display, you can make detailed settings.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display.

Categories of detailed settings are

shown.

When the selected category is further

divided into sub-categories, the tab(s)

will be shown in the display.

When the setting is further divided into

additional settings, a list will be shown

in the display.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2 Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER.

3 Press the TAB [

] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

For details on the touch sensitivity settings, see page 29.

Playing Voices

The instrument features a variety of Voices, including exceptionally realistic piano Voices.

Playing the Piano Voice

Here, we’ll call up and play the piano voice. You can play the piano voice using the pedals or metronome.

4 Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH.”

5 Press the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard.

Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain

displays and functions.

For example, the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

]

KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH.

[PIANO RESET] button

(page 29)

METRONOME

[ON/OFF] button

(page 30)

VOICE category selection buttons (page 32)

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

One-touch Piano Play

This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconﬁgures the entire instrument for optimum

piano performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings

by a single button press.

Piano Lock Function

The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by

pressing another button on the panel. Once locked, the instrument stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are

pressed—preventing you from accidentally starting a Song (page 35) during your piano performance.

1 Press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel for three seconds

or longer, until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock.

2 Press the [F] (OK) button to enable Piano Lock.

3 To turn Piano Lock off, press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button again for three seconds or

longer.

Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel.

Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard

You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch

sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices.

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

] KEYBOARD/

PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

2 Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to specify the touch response.

HARD 2 ..... Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best

for players with a heavy touch.

HARD 1 ..... Requires moderately strong playing for high volume.

NORMAL... Standard touch response.

SOFT 1....... Produces high volume with moderate playing strength.

SOFT 2....... Produces relatively high volume even with light play-

ing strength. Best for players with a light touch.

•This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard.

•When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for

the corresponding parts by pressing the [5

†

]–[7

†

] buttons. When

Touch is set to OFF, you can specify the ﬁxed volume level by press-

ing the [4

π†

] button.

•The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using the Pedals

The instrument features three pedals.

● Damper Pedal (Right)

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an

actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even

after releasing the keys.

• Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes

have been released while the damper pedal is held.

• Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT,” “GM&XG” and “GM2”

groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal.

● Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal

while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is

held. All subsequent notes will not sustain.

• Certain Voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when

the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

• Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT”, “GM&XG” and “GM2”

groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal.

● Left Pedal

When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume

and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play.

The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected Voice.

n The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 101).

● Foot Controller/Footswitch

An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and

used to control various functions assigned (page 191).

Using the Metronome

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Left Pedal

When you press the damper pedal

here, the notes you play before you

release the pedal have a longer sustain.

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain as

long as you hold the pedal.

Making Settings for the Pedals

You can assign one of the various functions to the three pedals or an optional foot controller/footswitch, doing things

like controlling the Super Articulation voices (page 78) or starting and stopping the Style (

page 191).

1 Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button to start the metronome.

2 To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button again.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound

■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

1 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display.

2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo.

Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] but-

tons simultaneously.

n About the Tempo display

The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and

500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display.

■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METRONOME

Set the parameters by pressing the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound.

SOUND

Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

Bell Off............... Conventional metronome

sound, with no bell.

Bell On............... Conventional metronome

sound, with bell.

English Voice ...... Count in English

German Voice .... Count in German

Japanese Voice ... Count in Japanese

French Voice....... Count in French

Spanish Voice ..... Count in Spanish

TIME

SIGNATURE

Determines the time signature of the metronome

sound.

Set the Popup Display Time

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME) button, and use the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

] buttons to set the time.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing Various Voices

The instrument features a variety of Voices such as strings or wind instruments, including exceptionally realistic piano

Voices.

Playing Preset Voices

The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. VOICE category selection buttons on the panel

correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [PIANO] button to display various piano

Voices.

n About the various Voices

Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.

Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are off.

The Voice selected here is the RIGHT 1 part. For the Voice part, see page 79.

1 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT1) buttons in the Main display to select the RIGHT 1

part.

Determining how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection

buttons is pressed).

You can select how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is

pressed).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS) button, and use the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to change

how the Voice selection display is opened.

• OPEN&SELECT:

Opens the Voice selection display with the top (ﬁrst) voice of the voice category automatically selected (when

one of the Voice category selection buttons is pressed). With the default settings, the OPEN&SELECT function

is turned on.

• OPEN ONLY:

Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice (when one of the VOICE category selection

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call

up the Voice selection display.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [7

] (INFORMATION) button.

n The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteris-

tics, see page 78.

n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

n Restoring the Piano settings

Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

4 Play the keyboard.

Recalling your favorite Voices easily

The instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds—

making it perfect for virtually every musical application. However, the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming

at ﬁrst. To easily recall your favorite Voice, there are two methods:

● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the

[USER] button

1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive.

Refer to page 70 for details on the copy operation.

2 Call up the selection display.

[USER] → [F] VOICE (RIGHT1)

3 Select the desired Voice.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the Voice.

● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY

[1]–[8] buttons

Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Memory operations.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing the Voice Demos

To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context, listen to the demo songs for each Voice.

1 In the Voice Selection display (page 33 step 3), press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button to start

the Demo for the selected Voice.

2 To stop the Demo, press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button again.

Selecting percussion sounds

When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected, you can play various drums

and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys.

Selecting sound effects

You can play individual sound effects, such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard. The sound effects are

categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

1 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT 1) buttons to select the RIGHT 1 part.

2 Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.

3 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

4 Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

5 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

6 Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect.”

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect.

8 Play the keyboard.

Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices

n For details on the Voice allocation format, see page 199.

You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation.

Perform steps 1–4 described above, select the desired category, then select the desired voice.

Playing different Voices simultaneously

The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously (page 79).

• Layering two different Voices

This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds.

• Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, you can set up the keyboard to play the

bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Practicing with the Songs

n Song

On the instrument, performance data is called a “Song.”

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing

The instrument includes not only the preset demo Songs, but also many preset Songs. This section covers basic infor-

mation on playing back the preset Songs or Songs in a CD-ROM.

The preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

You can also select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song category.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs saved to USER (page 43)

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] button to select the USER tab.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.

n Select the ﬁle to which the data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed ﬁle to which the data is saved by pressing the [USER] button.

[USER] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J]

Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device (page 43)

For information on using USB storage devices, see page 22.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the USB tab (“USB1”/“USB2”), corresponding to the USB storage device

you inserted in Step 1.

The indication “USB1”/“USB2” will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices.

4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

n Select the ﬁle to which the data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed ﬁle to which the data is saved by pressing the [USB] button.

[USB] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J]

Playing Songs in sequence

You can play all Songs in a folder continuously.

1 Select a Song in the desired folder.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

3 Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL.”

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

All Songs in the folder play back continuously, in order.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop continuous playback.

6 To turn off the Song sequence playback, press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Boost the volume of the part to be practiced

On the instrument, a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels. Specify the channel for

practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel.

1 Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back Songs Before Practicing (page 35 step

1–5).”

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8)” is shown at the top of the dis-

play.

5 Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.”

6 To raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display, press the [MIXING CON-

SOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9–16) display.

If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise:

• Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.”

• Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you

which channel you wish to boost.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Displaying Music Notation (Score)

You can view the music notation of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before

starting to practice.

•The instrument can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs.

•The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as com-

mercially available sheet music of the same song—especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short

notes.

•The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes. For information on creating Song data, see

page 143.

n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song

Press the TAB [

] button to select subsequent pages.

The “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position.

Changing the Notation Display

You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal

preferences.

1 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music nota-

tion.

2 Changing the following settings as desired.

● Changing the size of the music notation

Press the [7

π†

] button to change the size of the

music notation.

● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part

notation

Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] button to disable display of

the left-hand part/right-hand part.

● Customizing the notation display

• Display the note name at the left of the note

1 Press the [5

ππ

††

] (NOTE) button to display the note name.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

3 Press the [6

†

] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.”

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

•Turn on the note colors

Press the [6

π†

] button to turn the COLOR on.

n About the note colors

These colors are ﬁxed for each note and cannot be changed.

C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray

● Increase the number of measures in the display

You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be dis-

played (part, lyrics, chords, etc.).

Use the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired.

1 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SETUP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to set the view type.

3 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

n Save the notation view settings

The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 162).

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps

The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold

them down. You can also practice at your own pace—since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes cor-

rectly. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing the part using the guide lamps.

Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps

LEFT CH/RIGHT CH

Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This set-

ting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.

AUTO

The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically—

setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the [FUNCTION] → [B]

SONG SETTING.

1–16

Assigns the speciﬁed MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts.

OFF (LEFT CH only)

No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range.

KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu

is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation.

QUANTIZE

This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing

of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest

note value used in the song.

NOTE NAME

Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol-

lowing three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note

name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON.

A, B, C

Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

FIXED DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language.

The language is speciﬁed in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 63).

MOVABLE DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the

key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “So” would

be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

234

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

The indicator of the [TRACK 1 (R)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

n Have the guide lamp ﬂash a lead-in to the music

In the GUIDE LAMP TIMING, select NEXT (page 142).

Practice the muted part using the guide lamps.

n Adjusting the tempo

Refer to page 31.

Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

3 Press the [TRACK 1 (R)] button to mute the right-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display.

When the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button.

2 To adjust the Song volume, press the [1

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

n About keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

See page 79.

Other guide functions

The initial setting “Follow Lights (page 142)” was used in the instructions “One-handed Practice with the Guide

Lamps” above. There are additional functions in the Guide feature, as described below. To select a guide function, see

page 141.

For keyboard performance

• Any Key

This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys.

For Karaoke

• Karao-Key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger, while you sing along (page 54).

•Vocal CueTIME

This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody (pitch) of your singing—allow-

ing you to practice singing with the correct pitch.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Using the Guide Lamps

The indicator of the [TRACK 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a Song. This

is useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.

Playing Back a Song Repeatedly

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [STOP] button.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat-

edly (A-B Repeat)

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

3 Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button

again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly.

n Instantly returning to Point A

Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [STOP] button returns to Point A.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

1,2 Follow the same steps as in “Practice the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the

Guide Lamps” on page 39.

3 Press the [TRACK 2] button to mute the left-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback and practice the muted part

using the guide lamps.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range

● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped

1 Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point A location.

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A.

3 Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point B location.

4 Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B.

● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song

Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song.

Recording Your Performance

Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. This is an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily

compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by

yourself, if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard.

A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT]

button.

1 Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

2 Select a Voice (page 32). The selected Voice will be recorded.

3 Press the [REC] button.

4 Start recording.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

6 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to

save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a

USB storage device.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 73).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

To cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

CAUTION

The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper-

ation.

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology

This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback.

n Before using performance assistant technology

To use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chord

name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or

not.

In these example instructions, we recommend that you use the Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

7 Save the recorded performance.

When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/“Song” modiﬁé.

Sauv.?/“Song” cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “’Song” ?

The recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection dis-

play and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button.

Playing Songs saved to a USER/USB storage device

Refer to page 36.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Call up the operation display.

3 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) on.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords,

no matter what keys you play. It even changes the sound according to the way you play. Try playing in the

three different ways below.

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accom-

paniment Feature (Style Playback)

The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing

“chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra—

even if you’re playing by yourself. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the

Styles. The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and

many others.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Play the keyboard.

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 1).

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 2).

Playing the left hand and right hand

alternately.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

Play several notes one after

the other with different ﬁn-

gers of your right hand.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

●● ●

6 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

7 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) off.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature

122 233 35

1 1 1

21 2 3 2 3 2 1

1 1 4 1

CGC

GCC

MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB

Traditional

Style: Country Pop

Ending

1 Press the STYLE CONTROL “COUNTRY” button.

Enabling tempo display above Style name

You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] buttons to switch the tempo dis-

play on/off.

• ON:

Tempo is displayed above the Style name.

With the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on.

• OFF:

Tempo is not displayed above the Style name.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

•The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. For details on the character-

istics, see page 107.

•When the [7

] (REPERTOIRE) button is pressed after selecting a Style, you can call up the custom panel settings (for

voices and tempos, etc.) designed to best match the selected Style. To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT]

button.

•You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

n Chord Fingerings

There are seven different ﬁngering methods you can use to specify chords (page 107).

When Ending playback is ﬁnished, the Style automatically stops.

• About the various Styles

Refer to the Style List in the separate Data List booklet.

• Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

• Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range)

See page 111.

• Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch)

See page 110.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “CountryPop.”

3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

3 45 6

4 Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby—letting you

simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Auto Accompaniment starts.

6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing the [ENDING] button, at the

point in the score (page 45) indicated by “Ending.”

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Pattern Variation

While you play, you can automatically add specially created intros and endings, as well as variations in the rhythm/

chord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompani-

ment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your per-

formance. Try out the variations and combine them freely.

To Start Playing

● Start/Stop

Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Intro

This is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro ﬁnished play-

ing, accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback” below).

Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button to start Style playback.

● Synchro Start

This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard.

Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard

to start Style playback.

● Tap

Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO]

button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped.

n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following

display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB[

√

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP

Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard (page 40)

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. If the Balance display is not selected, press the [EXIT] button.

2 To adjust the Style volume, press the [2

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

Fade In

For information on the settings, see page 191.

n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 109.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

During Style Playback

● Main

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats

indeﬁnitely. Each preset Style features four different patterns.

Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback.

● Fill In

The ﬁll-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your per-

formance sound even more professional.

Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. Then, simply press one of the

MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D) buttons as you play, and the selected ﬁll-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL), spic-

ing up the auto accompaniment. When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B, C, D).

Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off, pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically

plays a ﬁll-in before returning to the same main section.

● Break

This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more

professional.

Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback.

To Finish Playing

● Start/stop

Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Ending

This is used for the ending of the Song. Each preset Style features three different endings. When the ending is ﬁnished,

the Style stops automatically.

Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. You can have the ending gradually slow down

(ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button again while the ending is playing back.

n If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button in the middle of your performance, a ﬁll-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit. [I].

Others

● Synchro Stop

When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the chord section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance.

Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback.

• Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window)

See page 110.

• Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set)

For example, you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style (page 110).

● Fade Out

For information on the settings, see page 191.

n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 109.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback

Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords

If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play

(Chord Tutor function).

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING

The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display.

n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which ﬁngering type is selected (page 108).

About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps

• Green

The section is not selected.

• Red

The section is currently selected.

• Off

The section contains no data and cannot be played.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the root note.

2 3

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] button to select the chord type.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Checking How to Play Chords with the Guide Lamps

For Songs containing chord data, you can have the individual notes of the chords indicated with the Guide lamps on

the instrument.

The Guide lamps in the chord section of the keyboard ﬂash according to the chords of the Song. Try practic-

ing the chords, matching the Guide lamps.

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch

Setting)

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided

which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you.

Not only does this instantly call up all the

settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the

current Style—it also automatically turns on

ACMP and SYNC START, so that you can

immediately start playing the Style.

n Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 132).

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button and press the [B] button to call up the Song Setting dis-

play, and make sure that the GUIDE MODE is set to “Follow Lights.”

3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

4 Press the [GUIDE] button.

5 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

1 Select a Style (page 46 step 2).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting

● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link)

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when

you select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button.

n Setting the timing for OTS changes

The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 110).

● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS

You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects,

and so on) as desired.

2 Press the [MEMORY] button.

3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

A message appears in the display prompting you to save

the panel settings.

It is possible to save the panel settings with another ﬁle

(step 4), so register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4.

4 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection

display and save the panel settings as a Style ﬁle (page 69).

CAUTION

The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song—Music Finder

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be

appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function can help you out. Simply select the desired music genre

from among the Music Finder “Records,” and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel set-

tings to let you play in that music style.

A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 114).

n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back.

The ALL tab contains the preset records.

•You can also select the desired record by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

• Searching the records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword—and

instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 112).

• MUSIC ...............Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record, letting you easily

ﬁnd the desired music style.

n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically

When sorting records by song title, use the [1

π†

] button to skip up or down through the songs

alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• STYLE.................This is the preset Style assigned to the record.

n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically

When sorting records by Style name, use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

] button to skip up or down through the

Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• BEAT ..................This is the time signature registered to each Record.

• TEMPO ..............This is the assigned tempo setting for the record.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the ALL tab.

3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories.

To select a record, press the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] buttons.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record.

• Tempo Lock

Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the

Tempo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display.

• Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 132).

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Rep-

ertoire)

The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for

the currently selected Style.

n The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles

saved to a USB storage device. To use the Repertoire function, save the desired Style in “USER” tab.

The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the

Music Finder. The list of the search results is shown on the “SEARCH 2” display of the Music Finder.

CAUTION

When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is

lost.

4 Play the keyboard.

1 Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the

“PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style selection display.

2 Press the [7

ππ

] (REPERTOIRE) button.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the desired panel settings.

Sorting the records

Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records.

• MUSIC .................. The record is sorted by song title.

• STYLE.................... The record is sorted by Style name.

• BEAT ..................... The record is sorted by beat.

• TEMPO ................. The record is sorted by tempo.

Changing the order of the records

Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending).

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or

Your Own Performance

Connect a microphone to the instrument and sing along with Song playback (Karaoke) or your own perfor-

mance.

The lyrics can be displayed when the Song contains lyric data. Sing with the microphone as you read the lyr-

ics shown in the display. Lyrics can also be displayed with the music score, letting you play and sing while fol-

lowing along with the notation and lyrics.

Connecting a Microphone

n Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is con-

nected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is

highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is

connected.

Adjust the controls while checking the SIGNAL and OVER lamps. The SIGNAL

lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being received. Make sure to

adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp is light. The OVER lamp lights

when the input level is too high. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so

that this lamp does not light.

Disconnecting the microphone

Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position.

2 Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC./LINE IN] jack.

n Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position before turning off the power.

1 Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone.

2 Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum

position.

3 Connect the microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack.

MIN MAX

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

2, 5

4 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch to “MIC.”

5 (For microphones having a power source, turn on the power ﬁrst.) Adjust the [INPUT

VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Singing with the Lyrics Display

Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data

When the Text display appears, press the [1

†

] (LYRICS) button to display the lyrics.

Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays.

• When the lyrics are unreadable

You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” or “Japanese” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B]

SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 162).

• Changing the Lyrics Background Picture

You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display. Press the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

] (BACKGROUND) button in the Lyrics dis-

play to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture ﬁles and select the desired one. Press the [EXIT] button

to return to the previous display.

The lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song (page 162).

• Changing the lyrics

You can change the lyrics as desired (page 166).

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to display the lyrics.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Displaying Text

This feature lets you show text ﬁles (created on a computer) in the display of the instrument, enabling various

useful possibilities, such as the showing of lyrics, chord names, and text notes.

1 Connect the USB storage device containing the text ﬁle to [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to display the text.

When the lyrics are displayed, press the [1

†

] (TEXT) button to display the text.

3 Press the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] (TEXT FILE) buttons to call up the Text selection display.

4 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired TAB.

5 Double-click one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a text ﬁle.

If the text is long, use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select other pages.

n An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages (page 191).

The following additional settings are available in the TEXT display:

LYRICS ..........................................Switches the screen to the Lyrics display.

CLEAR...........................................Clears the text from the display (the text data itself is not erased).

FIXED 16-PROPORTIONAL 28 .....Determines the text type (ﬁxed or proportional) and font size.

TEXT FILE......................................Opens the Text selection display.

BACK GROUND...........................Allows changing of the background picture of the text display, as in the Lyrics

display described above. The background setting is common for both the Lyr-

ics display and Text display.

•The text ﬁle, which is copied in the USER tab can be showed.

• Line feed (or “carriage return”) is not automatically performed in the instrument. If a sentence is not displayed in its

entirety because of limitations in the screen space, execute the line feed on your computer.

•When the background color is speciﬁed in the song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Convenient Functions for Karaoke

Transpose

You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low.

•Transposing the Song key up................ Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button.

•Transposing the Song key down........... Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button.

• Resetting the transposition ................... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

Applying Effects to Your Voice

You can also apply various effects to your voice.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

n Selecting an effect type

You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 92).

Adjusting the tempo ➤ page 31

Transpose ➤ See below.

Applying Effects to Your Voice ➤ See below.

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice ➤ page 57

Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME) ➤ page 142

1 Use an appropriate video cable to connect the [VIDEO OUT]/[RGB OUT]

connector of the instrument to the video input connector on the TV/com-

puter monitor.

2 Set the external television, video, or computer monitor signal (NTSC,

PAL, or RGB) used by your video equipment, if necessary.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SCREEN OUT

Press the [1

π†

] button to select the external television, video, or com-

puter monitor signal.

RGB OUT

computer monitor

TV monitor

Displaying the lyrics/text on an external TV, video, or computer monitor

The lyrics/text indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT/RGB OUT terminal.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to turn the effect on.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice

You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice.

If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song

playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

For details on the Vocal Harmony types, refer to the separate Data List.

The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data.

1 Select a Song which contains chord data (page 35).

2 Call up the operation display.

3 Press the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons to turn the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) on.

4 Press the [H] button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display.

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type.

6 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

7 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button and sing into the microphone.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance

Changing the Key (Transpose)

You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, the Song data is in F, but

you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the

keys, set the Master Transpose to “0,” the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and the Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the

keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

The following types are available. Select the one most suited to your purpose.

●KEYBOARD

Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord

section of the keyboard).

●SONG

Transposes the pitch of Song playback.

●MASTER

Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument.

You can set the value in semitone steps.

To reset the transpose value, press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

Changing the Key (Transpose) ➤ See below.

Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics and Text on external monitor ➤ page 59

Making Announcements Between Songs ➤ page 59

Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ➤ page 142

Adjusting the microphone and Song volume (page 40)

You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display.

If the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button.

2 To adjust the microphone volume, press the [4

π†

] button.

To adjust the Song volume, press the [1

π†

] button.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select the desired transpose type.

3 Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics

and Text on external monitor

This convenient sing-along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument (for your

playing purposes), while only the lyrics are shown on an external monitor (page 56) so your audience can sing along.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SCREEN OUT

Making Announcements Between Songs

This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances. When singing a song, several

effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup. When speaking to your audience, however, these effects may sound dis-

turbing or unnatural. Whenever the TALK function is turned on, effects are automatically turned off.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

n Talk settings can be customized as well, allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audi-

ence (page 174).

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [3

ππ

]/[4

ππ

] button to select LYRICS.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [2

ππ

]/[3

ππ

] (TALK) button to turn the function on.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Performance as Audio (USB

Audio Recorder)

Here you’ll learn how to record your performance as audio data to a USB ﬂash memory. For example, by connecting a

guitar, microphone or other device to the instrument, you can record an ensemble performance of guitar and keyboard

together or record yourself singing along with Song playback. The performance data is saved as a WAV ﬁle of conven-

tional CD quality (44.1 kHz/16 bit). Since it is possible to play back the ﬁle on computer, a listener doesn’t need to

have the particular instrument in order to hear the performance. This makes it possible to easily share your perfor-

mances and recordings with your friends via e-mail, record your own CDs, or upload the recordings to websites for

many others to enjoy as well.

Recording methods on the instrument include MIDI recording as well as audio recording. For details about the differ-

ence between audio and MIDI recording, see page 196. For speciﬁc instructions on MIDI recording, refer to page 200.

•When recording with the USB Audio Recorder function, make sure to use an appropriate USB ﬂash memory device.

• In order to record your own original CD, you’ll need a CD-R drive (or compatible device). Refer to the manual that came with your

speciﬁc computer for details.

•When you attach a recorded ﬁle in an e-mail message, make sure the ﬁle size is small enough to be sent.

The following sounds can be recorded.

• Internal tone generator of the instrument.

Keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left), Song parts, Style parts

• Input from a microphone, guitar or other instrument (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack).

• Input from another audio device, such as a CD player, MP3 player or the like (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack).

n Songs protected by copyright, such as preset songs, and the metronome sound cannot be recorded.

Moreover, the effect of iAFC (page 82) is not reﬂected in the recording.

The recorded data using this function is saved as:

• Stereo WAV data

• 44.1 kHz sample rate/16 bit resolution

Recording Your Performance as Audio

Now, try recording a performance of your singing along with Song playback with a connected microphone. The maxi-

mum amount of recording time is 80 minutes, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the particular USB

ﬂash memory.

Here, you’ll also see by example how to sing along with accompaniment/Style playback. To set the Style, go

on to step 6 (page 46).

•To record your performance by USB Audio Recorder, use the compatible USB ﬂash memory. When the USB ﬂash

memory is not compatible, it is not likely to be able to record/playback normally.

• Before using a USB ﬂash memory, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy

Disk, etc)” on page 22.

1 Set the desired Voice, etc. which you want to use for your performance, and connect

a microphone. (For information on setting the Voice, see page 28; for connecting a

microphone, see page 54.)

2 Connect the USB ﬂash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

The following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display.

• DRIVE NAME ...................................... Number of the USB storage device (USB 1, USB 2, etc.)

• ALL SIZE .............................................. Size of USB storage device

• FREE AREA........................................... Available recording space on the USB storage device

• POSSIBLE TIME.................................... Available time for recording

Press the [F] (OK)/[EXIT] button to close the PROPERTY display.

n The USB storage device of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB storage devices are connected. If a

ﬂoppy disk drive is assigned to “USB1,” “USB1” will be skipped. To check the number of the USB storage device (USB1 and USB2,

etc.), press the [A]/[B]/[F] button on the display of step 4, and change the tab. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

When recording begins, the “RECORDING” indication on the display changes to red, and the elapsed

recording time is displayed.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB ﬂash memory, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so

may corrupt the USB ﬂash memory data or the recording data.

The ﬁle name is automatically named (and is always given a new, unique name), and a message indicating

the ﬁle name is displayed.

n The recording operation continues, even if you close the Recording display by pushing the [EXIT] button. To stop the

recording, press the [J] (STOP) button on the Recording display.

3 Press the [USB] button.

4 Press the [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER) button to call up the recording display

(USB AUDIO RECORDER display).

5 If necessary, press the [E] (PROPERTY) button to call up the Property display, then

check the information of the USB ﬂash memory.

5 6, 7

6 Start recording by pressing the [J] (REC) button, then start your performance.

7 Stop recording by pressing the [J] (STOP) button.

Quick Guide

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing Back the Recorded Performance

Play back the recorded performance.

[USB] → [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER).

The ﬁle recorded is selected in step 1-7 (page 60). For information about the operation method to change the

name of the displayed ﬁle or to delete a ﬁle, see the section “File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Dis-

play” on page 68. However, the operation that copies/moves ﬁle/folder to the User tab cannot be done here.

The song is played back from the beginning, and the display indicates the auditioning process. This display

closes automatically when auditioning is stopped. Press the [G] (CANCEL) or [EXIT] button to stop audition-

ing.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB ﬂash memory, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so

may corrupt the USB ﬂash memory data or the auditioning data.

n Audio recording is processed internally so that playback volume will be appropriate when played on a computer. There-

fore, the playback sound might be distorted if you record at too high a volume. In this case, lower and adjust the volume

of each part with Volume Balance display (page 40) and the Mixing Console (page 88), etc., and try recording again.

1 Call up the USB AUDIO RECORDER display.

Press the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] (AUDITION) button to display the audio ﬁles (WAV data)

saved to the connected USB ﬂash memory.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the ﬁle you want to listen to, then

press the [8

††

] (AUDITION) button.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the USB AUDIO RECORDER display shown in step 4

of “Recording Your Performance as Audio” above.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting Message Language

You can select the desired language of the display messages.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Use [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

The Messages Shown in the Display

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen

to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate

button.

The language selected here is

also used for various “Mes-

sages” shown during operations.

In this example, press the [F] (YES) button

to start formatting the MEDIA (USB storage

device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy

disk, etc).

Instant Selection of the Displays—Direct Access

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Instant Selection of the Displays—

Direct Access

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired

display—with just a single additional button press.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.

A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate

button.

2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to

instantly call up that display.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up

with the Direct Access function.

Example of calling up the Guide function display

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button.

Returning to the Main display

You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by

simply pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Displays (Main Display and File

Selection Display)

There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of

each display segment and its basic operation.

Main Display

The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur-

rently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The

Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard.

1 Voice name

• RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 79).

• RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 79).

• LEFT (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 79).

When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 86). Pressing one of

the [A]–[C] and [F]–[H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 32).

2 Style name and related information

Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [D]

button calls up the Style Selection display (page 45).

3 Current chord name

If the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is set to On, the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the

keyboard will be displayed.

4 Song name and related information

Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo.

If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD”

segment (see 3 above). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 35).

5 Registration Memory Bank name

Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name.

Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 132).

When the Freeze function is ON, an “F” indication appears (page 133).

6 Volume Balance

Displays the volume balance among the parts.

Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

7 Transpose

Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 56).

8 Tempo

Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style.

9 BAR (current position of the Song or Style)

Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style.

) Recording status of USB Audio recorder

While recording, a “REC” indication appears.

! Registration Sequence

Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 134).

Returning to the Main display

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the Main display from

any other display: Simply press

the [DIRECT ACCESS] button,

then the [EXIT] button.

When you select the RIGHT 1

part,

√

appears at the right of

the Voice name.

When you select the RIGHT 2

part,

√

appears at the right of

the Voice name.

When you select the LEFT part,

appears at the left of the Voice

name.

78 !)

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

File Selection Display Conﬁguration and Basic Operation

The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below. From here you can select

Voices, Styles, and other data.

File Selection Display Conﬁguration

• Location (drive) of data

• Data ﬁles and folders

The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “ﬁles.”

You can drop ﬁles into a folder.

VOICE category selection buttons

SONG SELECT button

REGIST BANK

selection buttons

STYLE category

selection buttons

Preset

Location where pre-programmed

(preset) data is stored.

User

Location where recorded or

edited data is saved.

USB

Location where data on USB storage device

(USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc) is saved.

Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.”

Folder

Icon

File

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

File Selection Display Basic Operation

1 Select the tab containing the desired ﬁle by using the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons.

2 Select the page containing the desired ﬁle by using the [1

ππ

]–[7

ππ

]

buttons ([1

ππ

]–[5

ππ

] buttons for Voice, [1

ππ

]–[6

ππ

] buttons for Song

and Style).

3 Select the ﬁle. There are two ways to do so.

• Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

• Select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]

button to execute.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Select the ﬁle to which the

data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed

ﬁle to which the data is to be

saved by pressing the [USB]/

[USER] buttons.

[USB]/[USER] → [A] SONG/[B]

STYLE/[F] VOICE → [A]–[J]

This display shows the Voice ﬁles

in a folder.

The next highest level—in this case,

folder—is shown. Each folder shown in

this display contains appropriately cat-

egorized Voices.

Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level

folder

To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press

the [8

] (UP) button.

Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display

The PRESET Voice ﬁles are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection

Display

•Saving Files .............................................................................................page 69

• Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)....................................................... page 70

•Moving Files (Cut & Paste)....................................................................... page 71

• Deleting Files/Folders .............................................................................. page 71

• Renaming Files/Folders............................................................................page 72

• Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of ﬁle name) .............. page 72

• Creating a New Folder ............................................................................ page 72

• Entering characters.................................................................................. page 73

The indications USB 1, USB 2,

etc. will be displayed depending

on the number of the connected

devices.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message

may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the

format operation.

CAUTION

The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media

you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe-

cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias.

1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO

DEVICE].

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

]MEDIA

3 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the “USB” Tabs (USB1/USB2) con-

nected to the devices in step 1.

4 Press the [H] button to format the media.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Saving Files

This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve

created) to a ﬁle.

1 After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR

or VOICE SET display, press the [SAVE] display button.

The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind

that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display.

2 Select the appropriate tab (USER/USB) to which you want to save the

data by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 73).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

The saved ﬁle will be automatically located at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Internal memory (User tab

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 3.2MB.

This capacity applies to all ﬁle

types, including Voice, Style,

Song, and Registration data ﬁles.

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)

This operation lets you copy a ﬁle/folder and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to copy.

2 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the dis-

play.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to paste the ﬁle/folder, by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle/folder.

The folder/ﬁle copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate

position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Restrictions for protected Songs

Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal

copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the

upper left side of the ﬁle names. The indications and relevant restrictions

are detailed below.

Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song ﬁle operation

Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be

played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time.

Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra

Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These

cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be

copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display

and USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to

the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song.

These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the

USER tab display and USB storage device.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Moving Files (Cut & Paste)

This operation lets you cut a ﬁle and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle you want to move.

2 Press the [2

††

] (CUT) button to cut the ﬁle.

The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the dis-

play.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles indicated on the current dis-

play including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection.

To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to which the ﬁle is to be

pasted, by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle.

The ﬁle moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Deleting Files/Folders

This operation lets you delete a ﬁle/folder.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to delete.

2 Press the [5

††

] (DELETE) button.

The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Follow the on-display instructions.

YES ........................Delete the ﬁle/folder

YES ALL .................Delete all selected ﬁles/folders

NO ........................Leave the ﬁle/folder as is without deleting

CANCEL ................Cancel the Delete operation

Deleting all data in a USB

storage device at once

Formatting a USB storage device

completely erases all data on the

USB storage device (page 68).

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Renaming Files/Folders

This operation lets you rename ﬁles/folders.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to rename.

2 Press the [1

††

] (NAME) button.

The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/folder.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8

††

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Input the name (characters) of the selected ﬁle or folder (page 73).

The renamed folder/ﬁle appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

6 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the

Left of File Name)

You can select custom icons for ﬁles (shown at the left of ﬁle name).

1–4

Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders” section.

5 Press the [1

††

] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display.

Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [

] button to select

different pages.

To cancel the operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

8 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and

organized as desired, making it easier to ﬁnd and select your original data.

1 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to

create a new folder.

2 Press the [7

††

] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a

new folder.

3 Input the name of the new folder (page 73).

A new folder cannot be made in

the PRESET tab.

Folder directories for the

USER tab display

In the USER tab display, folder

directories can contain up to

four levels. The maximum total

number of ﬁles and folders

which can be stored is 2550, but

this may differ depending on the

length of the ﬁle names. The

maximum number of ﬁles/folders

which can be stored in a folder

in the USER tab is 250.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles/

folders and when entering the Keyword for Music Finder function/website. The

method is much the same as entering names and numbers to a conventional

mobile phone. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below.

1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1

ππ

] button.

• If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language

(page 63), the following different types of characters are available:

CASE......................Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

case .......................Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

• If you select Japanese as the Language (page 63), the following

different types of characters and sizes can be entered:

(kana-kan) ...Hiragana and Kanji, marks (full size)

(kana) ............Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)

(kana) ..............Katakana (half size), marks (half size)

A B C.....................Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), num-

bers (full size), marks (full size)

ABC.......................Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), num-

bers (half size), marks (half size)

2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] and [7

ππ

] buttons, corresponding to the

character you wish to enter.

For details on entering characters, refer to the following section, below

instruction step 4.

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and

return to the previous display.

Entering letters, numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or

pressing one of the character entry buttons. Alternately, you can wait for a

short time and the characters will be entered automatically.

• Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA

ENTRY] dial, and press the [7

†

] (DELETE) button. To delete all charac-

ters on the line at once, press and hold the [7

†

] (DELETE) button.

• Entering special character marks (Japanese “ ” and “ ”)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press

the [6

†

] button before actual entry of the character.

• Entering marks

1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the

†

] button to call up the mark list.

2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark,

then press the [8

] (OK) button.

Depending on the display for

character entry you are working

in, some types of characters can-

not be entered.

Even if you select Japanese as the

Language, when you enter the

characters in the lyrics editing

display (page 166), the Internet

Setting display (page 183), or

website, the type of characters

“CASE”/“case” may be entered.

The following half-size marks

cannot be entered for a ﬁle/

folder name.

\ / : * ? " < > |

Entering password or WEP key of

wireless LAN connection in the

website, those characters are

converted to “*“.

In the case of characters which

are not accompanied by special

character marks (with the excep-

tion of kanakan and half-size

katakana), you can call up the

mark list by pressing the [6

†

]

button after selecting a charac-

ter (before actual entry of a char-

acter).

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the

characters change each time you press the button.

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

• Inserting a Character

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press the [2

π†

]–[6

π†

], [7

] buttons to enter numbers and sym-

bols.

3 Press the [8

] (OK) button to enter characters.

• Entering a Space

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press [6

†

] button to call up the mark list.

3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list,

and press the [8

] (OK) button.

• Entering numbers

First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC”

”CASE“ (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase

alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2

π†

]–

π†

], [6

] and [7

] button, for a while, or press it repeatedly until

the desired number is selected.

• Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)

When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display

(highlighted), press the [1

]/[ENTER] button one or several times to

convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. To actually enter the

change, press the [1

†

]/[8

] (OK) button or enter the next character.

When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse

display (highlighted):

• Re-converting the characters into other kanji

Press the [1

]/[ENTER] button.

• Changing the reversed area

Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

• Changing the converted kanji back to “hiragana”

Press the [7

†

] (DELETE) button.

• Clearing the reversed area at once

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

• Entering the “hiragana” itself (without converting it)

Press the [8

] (OK) button.

• Canceling the character-entering operation

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

Restoring the Factory-programmed

Settings

Restoring the Factory-programmed System

While holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] but-

ton ON.

This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore

operation explained in step 2 of the following section.

e operat

on o

restor

ng t

factory-programmed settings

does not affect the Internet Set-

tings. To reset the Internet Set-

tings, refer to page 187.

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

]SYSTEM RESET

2 Select items by pressing the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory pro-

grammed settings by pressing the [4

ππ

] button.

4 Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all

checkmarked items.

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as

a Single File

For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall.

1 Make all desired settings on the instrument.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

]SYSTEM RESET

CAUTION

This operation deletes all your

original data for the respec-

tive item (MIDI SETUP, USER

EFFECT, MUSIC FINDER, and

FILES&FOLDERS).

SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory resettings.

Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details about which parameters

belong to the System Setup.

MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab

display to the original factory status.

USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master

EQ types, user master compressor types, and user vocal harmony types cre-

ated via the Mixing Console display to the original factory resettings.

MUSIC FINDER

Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory resettings.

FILES&FOLDERS Deletes all ﬁles and folders stored in the User tab display.

REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the

selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button

ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard).

Data Backup

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for sav-

ing your data.

4 Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

Note that the ﬁle in the PRESET tab display is the ﬁle of factory-programmed

settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective

item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 75 “Restoring the

Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item”.)

5 Save your ﬁle (page 69).

6 To recall your ﬁle, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the

ﬁle (same tab and page as speciﬁed in step 4), and press the corre-

sponding [A]–[J] button.

Data Backup

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your

important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the

internal memory is damaged.

The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1, 2, and 3 above.

SYSTEM SETUP

Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY and

microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup ﬁle. Refer to the sep-

arate Data List booklet for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup.

MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are

handled as a single ﬁle.

USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master EQ types,

user master compressor types, and user vocal harmony types created via the

Mixing Console displays are managed as a single ﬁle.

MUSIC FINDER

All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single ﬁle.

Data that can be saved

1 Song*, Style, Registration Memory Bank and Voice

2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template and System File

* Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indication at the upper left of the ﬁle name)

cannot be saved.

However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation)

to a USB ﬂash memory.

**Effect data includes the following:

- Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ/CMP.”

- Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type.

3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above, as well as the Internet settings.

Basic Operation

Data Backup

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Backup procedure

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the display containing the desired

ﬁle to be copied.

Song:

Press the [SONG SELECT] button.

Style:

Press the STYLE category selection buttons.

Registration Memory Bank:

Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEM-

ORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] .

Voice:

Press one of the VOICE category selection but-

tons.

3 Select the USER tab by using the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the

ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation

appears at the bottom of the display.

5 Press the [6

††

] (ALL) button to select all

ﬁles/folders indicated on the current dis-

play and all other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL

OFF) button again.

6 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the

ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

]

(CANCEL) button.

7 Select the destination USB tab to which

the ﬁle/folder is to be copied, by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

8 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste

the ﬁle/folder.

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

SYSTEM RESET

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up

the relevant display for saving your data.

4 Select the appropriate USB tab to which

you want to save the data by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

5 Save your data (page 69).

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

OWNER

3 Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the

data to the USB storage device.

To restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE)

button in step 3 above.

• It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore

operation.

• Backup data which has not been created on the CVP-

409/407 cannot be restored.

CAUTION

Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER dis-

play before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the opera-

tion deletes the data.

1 Song, Style, Registration Memory Bank

and Voice Data

If a message appears indicating data

cannot be copied

Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated

at the upper left side of the ﬁle names) are

included in the copied ﬁles. These protected

Songs cannot be copied. However, Songs

with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-

and-paste operation) to a USB ﬂash memory.

2 Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Tem-

plate and System Data

3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Characteristics

The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice

name.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing Voices ................................................................................ page 28

Playing the Piano Voice ........................................................... page 28

Playing Various Voices............................................................. page 32

Mega Voices Compatibility

Mega Voices are unique to the

Clavinova and are not compati-

ble with other models. Any song

style data you’ve created on the

Clavinova using the Mega Voices

will not sound properly when

played back on other instru-

ments.

Natural!

These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument

sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts.

They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as

Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling.

S. Articulation!

The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural, featuring

the unique performance characteristics of each instrument—for example, guitar

scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments. They provide many

of the same beneﬁts as the MegaVoices (see below), but with greater playability

and expressive control in real time. To effectively play these natural sounds in

performance of certain voices, you may need to use the pedal or footswitch. For

details on how to best play each voice, call up the Information window (pressing

the [7

] button in the Voice Selection display).

Mega Voice The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They are

primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs

and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been cre-

ated as Mega Voices.

What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching. Normal

Voices use velocity switching, too—to make the sound quality and/or level of a

Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the instrument’s

Voices sound authentic and natural. However, with Mega Voices, each velocity

range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound.

For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance

techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds

would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired

effect. However, now with Mega Voices, a convincing guitar part can be played

with just a single Voice, using speciﬁc velocity values to play the desired sounds.

Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to

play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are,

however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when

you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part.

Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly

authentic, rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience.

Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric

instruments—thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisti-

cated programming.

Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated

technology—and feature a sound so ﬁnely detailed and natural, you’ll swear

you’re playing the real thing!

Live!Drums These are high-quality drum sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling

and Dynamic Sampling.

Live!SFX These are high-quality Latin percussion sounds taking full advantage of Stereo

Sampling and Dynamic sampling. They give you a broader and more versatile

range of Latin percussion than the normal drum Voices.

Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting

you play the sounds from the keyboard.

SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play

the sounds from the keyboard.

Organ Flutes!

This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various

footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 103 for details.

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing Different Voices Simulta-

neously

The instrument keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences

that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. It allows you to play several

different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you

play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right.

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and

Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a

rich, ensemble sound.

Keyboard Part Combinations

■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part)

You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for nor-

mal performance—for example, with the piano Voice.

Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are

turned off.

■ Dual: Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts)

You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound.

Refer to page 80 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part.

■ Split: Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and

Left parts)

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try play-

ing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right.

The keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard.

Refer to page 81 for Voice selection operations for the Left part.

■ Dual+Split: Playing Three Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

(Right 1, 2 and Left parts)

You can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound.

Adjusting the volume balance

among parts

Adjust the volume balance

among the parts in the BALANCE

display (page 40).

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 111.

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1

and 2 Parts)

You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts by turning

Dual on.

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button to play two Voices

simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts.

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice

selection display for the Right 2 part.

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

5 Play the keyboard.

6 Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, a LEFT

mark appears at the right of the

Voice name in the Main display.

Quickly selecting Voices for

Right 1 and 2 parts

You can quickly select the Right

1 and 2 part Voices, just from the

VOICE category selection but-

tons. Press and hold one VOICE

category selection button, then

press another. The Voice of the

ﬁrst pressed button is automati-

cally set for the Right 1 part,

while the Voice of the second

pressed button is set for the Right

2 part.

Switching the Dual on/off

with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Dual on/off (when the PART ON

OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] is appro-

priately assigned; page 191). This

is useful for turning the Dual on

and off while you play.

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts)

You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts)

by turning Split on.

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button to play different Voices

with the Right and Left Hands (Right 1 and Left parts).

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice

selection display for the Left part.

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

5 Play the keyboard.

6 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, a RIGHT

mark appears at the left of the

Voice name in the Main display.

Switching the Split on/off

with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Split on/off (when the PART ON/

OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] is appropri-

ately assigned; page 191). This is

useful for turning the Split on

and off while you play.

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 111.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of

the Sound (iAFC)

When iAFC is engaged, the instrument will sound deeper and more resonant, similar

to an acoustic musical instrument. This lets you experience the ambience and rever-

beration that are characteristic of performing on stage or simulates the sustain sound

that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano.

This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function. You can

also perform an automatic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect.

Adjusting the iAFC Depth

The depth of the acoustic piano resonance simulation and stage ambience simula-

tion can be set.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [H] iAFC SETTING

2 Press the [D] button to turn the iAFC on.

3 Press the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to adjust the DYNAMIC DAMPER

EFFECT depth.

• DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect

This simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper

pedal of a grand piano. The microphone is not used, but the sound pro-

duced within the instrument is processed to create a spacious sensation.

iAFC cannot be used in the

following cases.

•When the Speaker setting is

Headphones SW (page 17),

and headphones are con-

nected.

•When the Speaker setting is

Off.

• (CVP-409 grand piano type)

When the lid is closed or open

with the shorter stay.

When using iAFC, do not block

or cover the speaker located on

the underside of the keyboard

(CVP-409 grand piano type) or

the rear panel (CVP-409/407) of

the instrument. The optimal iAFC

effect cannot be obtained if this

speaker is blocked.

iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Elec-

tronic Microphone Rotator) tech

nology to ensure stability against

acoustic feedback.

Turning on the iAFC of the CVP-409 grand piano type

To turn on the iAFC, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be

turned on.

Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound (iAFC)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Press the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to adjust the SPATIAL EFFECT depth.

If you select the “SPATIAL EFFECT”, make sure to execute the calibration

operation (see below).

•SPATIAL EFFECT

Spatial Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by picking up

the output sound using internal microphones and output the sound from the

speaker on the underside (CVP-409 grand piano type) or the rear (CVP-409/

407) of the instrument. The spread and spaciousness of the sound is different

depending on the depth. The default setting for the depth is 0.

For lower depth settings: This creates the resonance and enhances the

acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of acoustic instruments

by creating a virtual soundboard.

For deeper depth settings: The sound of the instrument itself and the sound

of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by internal

microphones, and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of per-

forming together on stage.

Calibrating the iAFC Settings

This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal

iAFC effect will be obtained. Make sure to execute this operation when you use

“SPATIAL EFFECT.”

1 Press the [I] (MIC CALIBRATION) button in the iAFC operation display

(page 82) to call up the calibration display.

2 Press the [G] (CALIBRATION START) button to begin calibration.

When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise) will sound for about ﬁve

seconds. While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not make

audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova.

If the iAFC effect is slight or inaudible:

If it seems that iAFC is not effective when playing back Songs or Styles, turn

the iAFC feature off.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [H] iAFC SETTING

2 Press the [D] button to turn iAFC off.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Changing Pitch

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Restoring the Default Calibration Setting

[iAFC Default]

1 Press the [I] (MIC CALIBRATION) button in the iAFC operation display

(page 82) to call up the calibration display.

2 Press the [J] (BASIC SETTING) button to restore to the default setting.

Changing Pitch

Transpose

Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones).

•Transposing during performance

You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instru-

ment by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons.

•Transposing before performance

Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. You can set the

transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD), song playback (SONG), or overall

sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively.

1 Call up the operation display.

[MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [

√

][

] TUNE

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to set the transposition.

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument

You can ﬁne-tune the pitch of the entire instrument—useful when you play the

instrument along with other instruments or CD music.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

√

] MASTER

TUNE

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning.

Press the 4 or 5’s [

] and [

†

] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to

the factory resetting of 440.0 Hz.

Scale Tuning

You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for speciﬁc historical

periods or music genres.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

] SCALE TUNE

Please note that the Tune func-

tion does not affect the Drum Kit

or SFX Kit Voices.

Hz (Hertz):

This unit of measurement refers

to the frequency of a sound and

represents the number of times a

sound wave vibrates in a second.

Changing Pitch

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using

the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

Checkmark the box by pressing the [8

] button.

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.

The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the

keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display.

4 Change the following settings as necessary.

•Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE)

1 Press the [3

ππ

††

] button to select the note for tuning.

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning in cents.

• Determines the base note for each scale.

Press the [2

ππ

††

] button to select the base note.

When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed,

yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes.

Preset Scale Types

Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents)

* In the display, the rounded off value is shown.

Cent:

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/

100th of a semitone. (100 cents

equal one semitone.)

Instantly recalling the desired

scale

Registration Memory. Be sure to

checkmark the SCALE item when

registering (page 131).

EQUAL

TEMPERAMENT

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with

each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used

tuning in music today.

PURE MAJOR

PURE MINOR

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale,

especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth). You can hear this best in

actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing.

PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created

from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are collapsed into a single octave.

The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are

beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by

making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popu-

lar from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others,

used this scale.

WERCKMEISTER

KIRNBERGER

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys-

tems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and

Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has

its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the

time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when per-

forming period music on the harpsichord.

ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

CC##

DEbb

EFF##

GAbb

ABbb

EQUAL TEM-

PERAMENT

0 00 0 0 0000000

PURE MAJOR

0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PURE MINOR

0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PYTHAGOREAN

0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

MEAN-TONE

0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

WERCKMEISTER

0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

KIRNBERGER

0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

ARABIC 1

00-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0

ARABIC 2

0000-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Adding Effects to Voices Played on

the Keyboard

The instrument features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can

add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound.

1 Call up the operation display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

2 Select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing

one of the [A]–[C], [F]–[H] buttons.

3 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button to call up the VOICE EFFECT display.

4 Use the buttons at the lower/right part of the display to apply effects

to the Voices.

Effect Parameters

You can use a pedal to turn the

Harmony/Echo effects on and off

(page 191).

Portamento:

Portamento is a function that cre

ates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the

keyboard to the next. The porta-

mento time (the pitch transition

time) can be set via the MIXING

CONSOLE display (page 90).

DSP:

Stands for Digital Signal Proces-

sor (or Processing). DSP changes

and enhances the audio signal in

the digital realm to produce a

wide range of effects.

LEFT HOLD

This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are

released. Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-

type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been

pressed).

HARMONY/

ECHO

The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices (page 87).

MONO/POLY

This determines whether the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note

at a time) or polyphonically. Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead

sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively

control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato.

DSP/DSP

VARIATION

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and

depth to your music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes

you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.

•The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on

or off for the currently selected keyboard part.

•The DSP Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP

effect. You could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotat-

ing speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types.

In order to make the type you’ve selected here effective, set HARMONY/ECHO to

On in the display shown in step 4 above.

Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type

(see below).

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo set-

tings (page 88).

The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

Harmony/Echo Types

The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the

particular effect applied.

● Harmony Types

When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to notes

played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected

above and the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard shown below.

Echo Types

These types apply echo

effects to notes played in

the right-hand section of

the keyboard in time with

the currently set tempo.

Harmony Types

These types apply the harmony effect

to notes played in the right-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard according to the

chord speciﬁed in the left-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard. (Note that the

“1+5” and “Octave” settings are not

affected by the chord.)

Multi Assign Type

This type applies a special effect to

chords played in the right-hand section

of the keyboard.

Canceling the chord sound

for the harmony effect

This cancels the sound of the

chord played in the chord range

of the keyboard—letting you

hear only the Harmony effect.

Set [ACMP ON/OFF] to On, set

[SYNC START] to Off, and select

“Off” for the Stop Accompani-

ment parameter.

Split point Split point

Chord section for Style playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice and

chord section for

Harmony effect

Split Point

(for Style)

Split Point

(for keyboard Voice)

Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Chord section

for Style

playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice

Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

● Multi Assign Type

Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand

section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT

1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1

and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play.

● Echo Types

When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is

applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the cur-

rently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep

in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously

(last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately.

Harmony/Echo Settings

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE)

The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts

and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds.

It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the opti-

mum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied.

Basic Procedure

1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

VOLUME

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines

the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect.

SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type

above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects.

ASSIGN

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets

you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded.

CHORD

NOTE

ONLY

This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to

“ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note (played in the right-hand section of

the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard.

TOUCH

LIMIT

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines

the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selec-

tively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the

melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value).

1, 3

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

2 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable

items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 90.

3 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIX-

ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts.

The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different

part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The

various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following:

PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1–8 display →

SONG CH 9–16 display

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings.

• Saving the PANEL PART display settings

• Saving the STYLE PART display settings

Save them as Style data.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [B] STYLE CREATOR

2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.

3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for sav-

ing your data, then save it (page 69).

• Saving the SONG CH 1–8/9–16 display settings

First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save

the Song.

See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explana-

tion on page 162.

About Parts

See below.

Instantly setting all parts to

the same value

Once you’ve selected a parame-

ter in step 4, you can instantly

set the same value to all other

parts. To do this, simultaneously

hold down one of the [A]–[J] but-

tons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons

or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

About Parts

PANEL PART

In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can indepen-

dently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MIC parts. The part components are the

same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BAL-

ANCE] button (page 40).

STYLE PART

A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the

same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHAN-

NEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display.

SONG CH 1–8/9–16

A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are

the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Dis-

plays

The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING

CONSOLE displays.

VOL/VOICE

FILTER

TUNE

EFFECT

•The RHY2 channel in the

STYLE PART display can only

be assigned to Drumkit Voices

and SFX kit Voices.

•When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG CH

9–16 page) can only be used

for a Drum Kit Voice.

SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 91.

VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. When the Style

channels are called up, neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User

Voices can be selected. When the Song channels are called up,

User Voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel).

VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel, giving you ﬁne

control over the balance of all the parts.

HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 101) for each

part.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting

the cutoff frequency (page 101).

PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next. The Porta-

mento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values

result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in

no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard

part is set to Mono (page 86).

PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each

keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function).

OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each

keyboard part.

TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.

TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEY-

BOARD), Song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instru-

ment (MASTER), respectively.

TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 93). After editing various

parameters for the selected effect type, you can save it as an orig-

inal effect.

REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or chan-

nel.

CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or chan-

nel.

DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel.

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

EQ (Equalizer)

CMP (Master Compressor)

See page 97. This affects the overall sound of the instrument.

Song Auto Revoice

This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage

with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available

XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to

automatically assign the specially created Voices of the instrument (Natural!, Live!,

Cool!, etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type.

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2,

select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP dis-

play.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced.

6 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the

XG selected in step 5.

Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[G]/[I] but-

tons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one

action.

ALL REVOICE: Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the

high-quality Voices of the instrument.

PIANO REVOICE: Replaces only the piano Voices.

BASIC REVOICE: Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suit-

able for playing back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE: All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices.

TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the per-

formance environment (page 95). This affects the overall sound

of the instrument.

EDIT For editing the EQ (page 95).

EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

567

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply your Revoice settings.

To cancel the Revoice operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

8 In the VOL/VOICE tab display, press the [F] button to set SONG AUTO

REVOICE to ON.

Effect Type

■ Selecting an Effect type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2,

select the EFFECT tab.

4 Press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type selection display.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect BLOCK.

DSP:

Stands for Digital Signal Proces-

sor (or Processing). DSP changes

and enhances the audio signal in

the digital realm to produce a

wide range of effects.

5678

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the part to which you want

to apply the effect.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY.

8 Use the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect TYPE.

If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the effect

9 Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing

the effect parameters.

Effect Block Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing

in a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several

parts are being played simultaneously.

DSP1 STYLE PART

SONG CHANNNEL 1–16

In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types,

the instrument has special DSP effects, that

include additional effects usually used for a

speciﬁc part, such as distortion and tremolo.

DSP2

DSP3

DSP4

DSP5

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT,

SONG CHANNEL 1–16

Any unused DSP blocks are automatically

assigned to the appropriate parts (channels)

as needed.

DSP6 Microphone sound Dedicated for use only with the microphone

sound.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

10 If you have selected one of the DSP 2–5 effect blocks in step 5:

You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter.

To select the standard type of parameters, press the [B] button. To select its

variation parameter, press the [E] button.

11 Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type.

12 Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons. If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1

effect block in step 5:

Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8

π†

] button.

13 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your origi-

nal effect.

14 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the destination for saving

the effect.

The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the

effect block.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 69).

When recalling the saved effect, use the same procedure as in step 8.

Re-selecting the Effect block,

category and type

Use the [1

π†

]–[3

π†

] but-

tons. The re-selected effect con-

ﬁguration is displayed at the

upper left side box in the display.

Effect Return Level:

Determines the level or amount

of effect applied.

This is set for all parts or chan-

nels.

11 12

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

EQ (Equalizer)

Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spec-

trum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall

frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speak-

ers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of

the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too

“boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound

is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade ﬁve-

band digital EQ. With this function, a ﬁnal effect—tone control can be added to the

output of your instrument. You can select one of the ﬁve preset EQ settings in the

EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the fre-

quency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.

■ Select a Preset EQ type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2,

select the EQ tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your perfor-

mance (music style or environment).

If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ

5 Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display.

Gain

5 bands →

Bandwidth

(also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Freq (Frequency)

EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5

LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

6 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type.

7 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to boost or cut each of the ﬁve

bands.

Use the [8

π†

] button to boost or cut all the ﬁve bands at the same time.

8 Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the

band selected in step 7.

• Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Use the [1

ππ

††

]button. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band

width.

• FREQ (center frequency)

Use the [2

π†

]button. The available FREQ range is different for each

band.

9 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type

(page 69).

Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. When recalling the saved

EQ type, use the same procedure as in step 6.

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Master Compressor

Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (soft-

ness/loudness) of an audio signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as

vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic range, effectively making soft

sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall

level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound. Compres-

sion can be used to increase sustain for electric guitar, smooth out the volume of a

vocal, or bring a drum kit or rhythm pattern further up-front in the mix. The instru-

ment has a sophisticated multi-band compressor that allows you to adjust the com-

pression effect for individual frequency bands—giving you detailed sonic control.

You can edit and save your own custom Compressor types, or conveniently select

from one of the presets.

■ Selecting a Master Compressor type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 88. In step 2,

select the CMP tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master Compressor type.

Selecting a Master Compressor type automatically sets the parameters (at the

bottom of the display) to the optimum values for the type.

5 Press the [F] button to set the Master Compressor to ON.

If you want to edit the Master Compressor parameters, go on to the next operation.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

■ Editing and Saving the selected Master Compressor

6 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] buttons to select the frequency curve for the

Compressor, or which frequencies compression is applied to.

For example, select “LOW” when you want to emphasize low frequencies,

and “HIGH” when you want to emphasize high frequencies.

7 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the Threshold (mini-

mum level at which compression starts) and Gain (level of com-

pressed signal at three separate frequency bands).

These values offset those of the frequency curve settings in step 6.

8 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your origi-

nal Master Compressor settings.

9 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the destination for saving

the Master Compressor settings.

10 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the Master Compressor settings

(page 69).

When recalling the saved Master Compressor settings, use the same proce-

dure as in step 4.

Threshold:

Determines the minimum level

at which compression starts. The

compressor affects only the

sound of levels higher than that

of Threshold.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

The instrument has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own

Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a

Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) display for future recall.

The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other

Voices.

Basic Procedure

Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 32).

2 Press the [6

ππ

] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in

the VOICE SET Displays” on page 100.

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter)

to be edited.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the Voice.

6 Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited

Voice with the unedited Voice.

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 69).

Editing the ORGAN FLUTES

Voices

The editing method is different

for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices

compared to other Voices. For

instructions on editing the

ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see

page 103.

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

100

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 99. The Sound Creator param-

eters are organized into ﬁve different displays. The parameters in each display are

described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parame-

ters (page 106), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected.

PIANO

This display is available only when the Natural! piano Voice (page 78) is selected.

COMMON

CONTROLLER

1. MODULATION

When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to

modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the

degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters.

The available parameters differ

depending on the Voice.

Changes to velocity curve

according to Touch sensitivity

TOUCH SENSE DEPTH

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelDepth (with Off-

set set to 64)

TOUCH SENSE OFFSET

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelOffset (with

Depth set to 64)

Portamento Time:

The Portamento Time deter-

mines the pitch transition time.

Portamento is a function that cre-

ates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the

keyboard to the next.

127

ctual Velocity

or tone generator

Depth=127

(twice)

Depth=32

(half)

Depth=64

(normal)

Depth=0

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

127

Actual Velocity

for tone generator

Offset=96 (+64)

Offset=127

(+127)

Offset=64

(normal)

Offset=32

(-64)

Received

Velocity

(Actual

KeyOn speed)

Offset=0 (-127)

Depends on

offset

Depends on

offset

TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you feel the tuning

curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instru-

ments Voices.

STRETCH

Tuning curve particularly for pianos

FLAT

Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the

entire keyboard range

KEY OFF SAMPLE Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that

occurs when you release a key).

SUSTAIN SAMPLE Adjusts the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal.

STRING RESONANCE Adjusts the depth of string resonance.

VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.

TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the

volume responds to your playing strength.

DEPTH

Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the

voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).

OFFSET

Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted

for the actual velocity effect.

PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves.

When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the

R1/R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the

LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available.

MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or

polyphonically (page 86).

PORTAMENTO TIME

Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above.

FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cut-

off Frequency. For details about the ﬁlter, see page 101.

AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude

(volume).

LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or

the vibrato effect.

LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter

modulation, or the wah effect.

LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude,

or the tremolo effect.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

101

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

2. LEFT PEDAL

This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal.

SOUND

● FILTER

Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking

or passing a speciﬁc frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall

timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to

making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce elec-

tronic, synthesizer–like effects.

FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal. For details on

the pedal functions, see page 191.

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] but-

tons (RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2, LEFT, etc.)

Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the

respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the

function. For details, see page 192.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the

ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound.

HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance),

set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a

more pronounced effect.

Volume

Cutoff frequency

These frequencies are

“passed” by the ﬁlter.

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff range

Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

102

● EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound

changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural

acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or

the long release of a sustained piano tone.

● VIBRATO

EFFECT/EQ

1. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH

ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after

the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack.

DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a

slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the

quicker the decay.

RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is

released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

Level

Sustain level

Time

Key on Key off

AT TACK DECAY RELEASE

Vibrato:

A quavering, vibrating sound

effect that is produced by regu-

larly modulating the pitch of the

Voice.

DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result

in a more pronounced Vibrato.

SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.

DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of

a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the

delay of the Vibrato onset.

Pitch

Time

SPEED

DEPTH

DELAY

Switching the VIBE ROTOR

on/off with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

VIBE ROTOR on/off (when the

VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF function

is properly assigned; page 191).

REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 93) depth.

CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus (page 93) depth.

DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP (page 93) depth.

If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the DSP

menu explained on page 103.

DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off.

VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VIBE VIBRATE is selected for the DSP

Type parameter explained on page 93. Determines whether VIBE

VIBRATE should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

103

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

2. DSP

3. EQ

HARMONY

Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Select the Right 1 part (page 32,

step 1) in the Main display, before you set it. This has the same settings as the dis-

play of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on page 87 in step 1.

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

The instrument features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call

up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your

own original organ sounds by using the Sound Creator function. Just as on a tradi-

tional organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the ﬂute

footages.

Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 32).

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after select-

ing a category.

VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type.

Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variation-

parameter value setting.

ON/OFF

The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for

all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select

VARIATION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to

the Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the

VALUE menu explained below.

PARAMETER

Displays the variation parameter.

VALUE

Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.

EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ

bands.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

104

2 In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display, press the [6

ππ

] (FOOT-

AGE) button to call up the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] display.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the following “Editable

Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays.”

4 If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display, use the [A]/[B] buttons to

select the parameter to be edited.

5 Use the [A]–[D], [F]–[H] and [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the

Voice.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice

(page 69).

(When selecting

the EFFECT/EQ

tab display.)

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

105

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 103. The Organ Flutes

parameters are organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page

are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set

parameters (page 106), which are automatically called up when the Voice is

selected.

FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters)

FOOTAGE

VOLUME/ATTACK

ORGAN TYPE Speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or

Vintage.

ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker

speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes

(see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 103), and the Voice

Effect DSP (page 103) is turned on (this parameter has the same

effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter).

VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or

OFF.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3

(high).

Footage:

The term “footage” is a reference

to the sound generation of tradi-

tional pipe organs, in which the

sound is produced by pipes of

different lengths (in feet).

16' ← → 5 1/3'

Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1

π†

] button can

be switched by pressing the [D] button.

16'–1'

Determines the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes. The longer the pipe, the

lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the low-

est pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the

highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the

greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various vol-

umes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the volume.

RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 102) portion of the sound,

increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and

release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the

slower the swell and release.

VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato

On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH.

In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the ﬁrst notes played

and held simultaneously; while the ﬁrst notes are held, any subse-

quently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode,

attack is applied equally to all notes.

4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE

Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume

of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume.

LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter

decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic

bar, the longer the decay.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

106

EFFECT/EQ

Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained on

page 102.

Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.)

Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the

VOICE SET displays, including effects and EQ. Usually these settings are

automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also

disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained

below.

For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony

effect, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained

below).

You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [

]

VOICE SET

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling

up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter

group.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters contained in each

parameter group.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

107

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Characteristics

The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style

name.

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type

Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the

keyboard. There are seven types of ﬁngerings.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB [

] CHORD FINGERING

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select a ﬁngering.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature ..................................................................... page 45

Pattern Variation ...................................................................... page 47

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback ...... page 49

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style

(One Touch Setting) ................................................................. page 50

Pro

These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined

with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the

chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmo-

nies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment.

Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by

mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed

to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain

songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may

not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all

songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a

simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh

chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unex-

pected accompaniment.

Pianist These special Styles provide piano-only accompaniment. Just by play-

ing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add

complicated, professional-sounding arpeggios and bass/chord patterns.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

108

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels

of a Style

Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style. Try to play the melody along

with just the rhythm. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. Keep in mind,

however, that not all Styles contain rhythm channels.

1 Select a Style (page 45).

2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] to turn Auto Accompaniment off.

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the

rhythm channels.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm.

AI:

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

Starting the rhythm with Sync

Start

You can also start the rhythm

simply by playing the keyboard,

if Sync Start is enabled (turn on

the [SYNC START] button).

The rhythm does not sound for

the Pianist Styles (or other similar

Styles). When you want to use

any of these Styles, always make

sure that ACMP ON/OFF is

turned on.

SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce

orchestrated accompani-

ment using major, seventh,

minor and minor-seventh

chords by pressing a mini-

mum number of keys on the

Chord section of the key-

board. This type is available

only for Style playback.

The abbreviated chord ﬁn-

gerings described at right are

used:

MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings, so you

can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering types.

FINGERED

Lets you ﬁnger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard,

while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass,

and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. The Fingered type rec-

ognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List

booklet and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function (page 49).

FINGERED ON

BASS

Accepts the same ﬁngerings as the Fingered, but the lowest note played

in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing

you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the

chord is always used as the bass note).

FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way

similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and

right hands—for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a

chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a

melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously

played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced ﬁngering type is engaged, the instrument will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about

anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have

to worry about specifying the Style chords. Although the AI Full Key-

board type is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements

may not be suitable for use with this feature. This type is similar to Full

Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to

indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th,

11th and 13th chords cannot be played. This type is available only for

Style playback.

For a major chord,

press the root key only.

For a minor chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root key a

both a white and black key to its lef

Style Playback-related Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

109

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Playback-related Settings

The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions, which can be accessed in

the display , see page 110.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB[

√

] STYLE SETTING

Turning channels of the Style on/off

A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You

can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning

channels on/off as the Style plays.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/

OFF display.

When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

2 Press the [1

††

]–[8

††

] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate but-

ton for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback)

You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the

Style, by setting [ACMP ON/OFF] to on, and [SYNC START] to off. For

example, if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 108), you can perform with

your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of

the keyboard with your one ﬁnger.

Setting the fade in/out time

You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (page 137).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/

HOLD TIME

2 Set the parameters by using the [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go

from minimum to maximum.

FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go

from maximum to minimum.

FADE OUT HOLD

TIME

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade

out.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Playback-related Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

110

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons for each setting.

• Stop Accompaniment

When [ACMP ON/OFF] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords

in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accom-

paniment chord. In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord

ﬁngerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display.

From the display above, you can determine whether the chord played in the

chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status.

OFF...............................The chord played in the chord section will not sound.

STYLE...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

Voices of the selected Style.

FIXED ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

speciﬁed Voice, regardless of the selected Style.

• OTS Link Timing

This applies to the OTS Link function (page 51). This parameter determines the

timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]–

[D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)

Real Time.....................One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you

press a MAIN VARIATION button.

Next Bar ......................One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after

you press a MAIN VARIATION button.

• Synchro Stop Window

This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is

automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a

value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold

a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control

to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you

release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works.

• Style Touch

Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style vol-

ume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard.

• Style Change Behavior

There are three types as shown below.

Section Set

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting differ-

ent Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback

is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected.

When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest

section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in

the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up.

Data that is recorded when

recording a Song

Please note that both the Voice

that is sounded and the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “STYLE,” and only the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “OFF” or “FIXED.”

Split Point Settings

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

111

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Tempo

This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles dur-

ing Style playback.

HOLD ................The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained.

RESET.................The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the

selected Style.

Part On/Off

This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when

you change Styles during Style playback.

HOLD ................. The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained.

RESET.................All Style Channels are set to On.

Split Point Settings

These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sec-

tions of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1

and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are speciﬁed as note names.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING → TAB [

√

][

] SPLIT POINT

2 Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point (see below).

• Split Point (S)—separates the Chord section for Style playback from the

section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT)

• Split Point (L)—separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and

RIGHT 1– 2.

These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different

notes as desired.

Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be

set higher than Split Point (L).

Specifying the Split Point by

note name

Press the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] but-

tons. You can specify the Split

Point of the Voice and chord sec-

tion of the keyboard by using

STYLE in the display, and you can

specify the Split Point of the left

and right Voices by using LEFT.

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Split Point (S+L)

Chord section +

Voice LEFT

Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Split Point (S)

Split Point (L)

Chord section

Voice LEFT

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

112

Editing the Volume and Tonal Bal-

ance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items

(parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 90.) Call up the “STYLE

PART” display in step #3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and

Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 88, and follow the instructions.

Convenient Music Finder feature

Music Finder (page 52) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel

settings (for Voices, Styles, etc.) that match the song or type of music you want to

play. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited.

Searching the Records

You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search func-

tion of the Music Finder. You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display.

Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the ALL tab.

The ALL tab display contains the preset Records.

3 Press the [6

ππ

] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display.

4 Enter the search criteria.

Clear the search criteria

To clear the entered Music/Key-

word/Style, press the [F]/[G]/[H]

(CLEAR) button.

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

113

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

• Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword

1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B] (KEYWORD) button to call up the character

entry display.

2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 73).

• Search by Style name

1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display.

2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display.

• Adding other Search Criteria

You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style

name.

BEAT ............................Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your

performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings

are included in the search if you select ANY.

SEARCH AREA .............Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing

the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top

of the Music Finder display.)

TEMPO.........................Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your per-

formance by using the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] (TEMPO) but-

tons.

GENRE .........................Select the desired music genre by using the [5

π†

] (GENRE) buttons.

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.

The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel

searching, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

Entering several different key-

words

You can search several different

keywords simultaneously by

inserting a separator (comma)

between each.

Searching other music genres

When you want to search other music genres, press the [6

†

] (SEARCH 2)

button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the

SEARCH 2 display.

Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE)

When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if

the search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 53 for

details.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

114

Creating a Set of Favorite Records

As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder

records, you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records—so you can quickly

call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance.

1 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record

to the FAVORITE display.

3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, and

check to see if the record has been added.

Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display

1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display.

2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button.

Editing Records

You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly

created records are automatically saved in the internal memory.

1 Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display.

CAUTION

You can also change a preset

record to create a new one. If

you want to keep the original

preset, make sure to change

the name and register the

edited record as a new record

(see step 5, page 115).

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

115

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

3 Edit the record as desired.

• Editing the song name/keyword/Style name

Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 113).

• Changing the Tempo

Press the [1

π†

] (TEMPO) button.

• Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending)

Use the [2

π†

]/[4

π†

] buttons to select the section that will automatically be

called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you

want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro sec-

tion.

• Editing the Genre

Select the desired genre by using the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] (GENRE) buttons. When

creating a new genre, press the [7

π†

] (GENRE NAME) button and input the

genre name. (page 73)

• Deleting the Currently Selected Record

Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button.

• Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E]

(FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE.

5 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.

• Creating a new record

Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If

you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is

added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display.

• Overwriting an existing record

Press the [8

] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above,

the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the

FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.

Saving the Record

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi-

tionally created records as a single ﬁle. Keep in mind that individual records (panel

setups) cannot be handled as separate ﬁles.

1 Call up the Save display.

[MUSIC FINDER]→ TAB[

√

][

]ALL→ [7

π†

] (FILES)

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/

USB).

3 Press the [6

††

] button to save the ﬁle (page 69).

All records are saved together as a single ﬁle.

Keep in mind that the Beat set-

ting made here is only for the

Music Finder search function;

this does not affect the actual

Beat setting of the Style itself.

The maximum number of

records is 2500, including inter-

nal records.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

116

CAUTION

• Selecting "REPLACE" auto-

matically deletes all your

original records from inter-

nal memory.

Make sure that all impor-

tant data has been archived

to another location before-

hand.

•Make sure that all impor-

tant data has been archived

to another location before-

hand, when the ﬁle to

delete all records of the

Music Finder is down-

loaded from the web

(page 117) and executed.

Restoring the Music Finder

Data

You can restore the instrument’s

Music Finder to its original fac-

tory resettings (page 74).

Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/USB

To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/USB, follow the

instructions below.

1 Call up the [MUSIC FINDER] display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [

√

][

] ALL

2 Press the [7

ππ

††

] (FILES) button to open the File selection display of

the Music Finder.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select USER/USB.

4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder ﬁle.

The message is displayed according to the content of the ﬁle when the ﬁle

is chosen, and the desired button is pressed.

• REPLACE

All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and

replaced with the records of the selected ﬁle.

• APPEND

The records called up are added.

Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder ﬁle. Select “CANCEL”

to abort this operation.

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

117

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

You can create your own Styles—recording them by yourself or by combining the

internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited.

Style Structure

Styles are made up of ﬁfteen different sections and each section has eight separate

channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately

recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

The available contents of the ser-

vice described at left are subject

to change.

Viewing information about Music Finder records

Information on the record about which you like in Music Finder is called,

and the song of the model is downloaded, or it is possible to add it to

musical instruments by downloading the Music Finder record which you

like. For more details about this service, refer to the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/idc

1 Make sure that you’re connected to the Internet (page 179), press

the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons in the display to select the record

for which you want to view information on the Web.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to make a selection. After using

the dial to make a selection, press [ENTER].

3 Press the [J] (MUSIC FINDER +) button to open the Web page.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the browser screen and return to the

MUSIC FINDER display.

Style

Section

Four different

Fill-ins are

available.

Channel

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

118

Creating a Style

You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style.

The created Styles can also be edited (page 123).

■ Realtime Recording ➤ See below

This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. You can

select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want

to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired, or you can create a new

Style from scratch.

■ Step Recording ➤ See page 121

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter

each note or individually, and specify its length.

This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument,

since you can enter each event manually.

■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 122

This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various pat-

terns from the internal preset Styles. For example, if you want to create your own

original 8-beat Style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “70’s 8Beat” Style,

use the bass pattern from “ 60’s Rock1” Style and import the chord patterns from

the “Cool8Beat” Style—combining the various elements to create one Style.

Realtime Recording (BASIC)

Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using real-

time recording.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop Recording

Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and

Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with

a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes

that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record

while hearing previously recorded material.

• Overdub Recording

This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded

data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is

not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 120) and

Delete (page 120). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN

section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will

play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop

while hearing previously recorded material.

When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is

applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm),

delete the original data before recording.

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s Rock1

70's 8Beat Cool8Beat

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

119

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles:

1 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing

(page 45).

When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button

from the display shown in step 5 below.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display.

4 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the

RECORD display.

5 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the section (page 117) to

be recorded.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the length (number of

measures) of the selected section.

Actually enter the speciﬁed length for the selected section by pressing the

[D] (EXECUTE) button.

When recording channels BASS-

PHR2 based on an internal Style,

delete the original data before

recording. Overdub recording is

not possible on channels BASS-

PHR2 (see page 118).

When the RECORD display (chan-

nel indication) at the lower part of

the STYLE CREATOR display dis-

appears, you can press the [F]

(REC CH) button to re-display it.

Muting speciﬁc channels dur-

ing recording

Turn off the desired channels by

pressing the [1

†

]–[8

†

] but-

tons.

Specifying sections from the

panel buttons

You can specify the sections to

be recorded by using the Section

buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[END-

ING], etc) on the panel. Pressing

one of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display. Change

the sections by using the

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and

execute the selection by pressing

the [8

] button.

The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sec-

tions cannot be speciﬁed with

the panel controls.

Overdub recording possible.

Overdub recording not possible.

Delete the data before recording.

6 7-1

7-2

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

120

8 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down

the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered but-

ton, [1

††

]–[8

††

To cancel the selection, press the appropriate numbered button [1

†

]–[8

†

]

again.

9 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

]

buttons

and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

10 To delete a channel, simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) but-

ton and press the appropriate numbered button, [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again,

before releasing your ﬁnger from the [J] button.

11 Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

Playback of the speciﬁed section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern

plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by

one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on

recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the

section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below).

12 To continue recording with another channel, simultaneously hold

down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1

††

]–[8

††

]

button to specify the channel, then play the keyboard.

13 Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

14 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 69).

Limits on the recordable

Voices

• RHY1 channel:

Any except Organ Flute Voice/

S. Articulation Voice

• RHY2 channel:

Only drum/SFX kits

• BASS–PHR2 channels:

Any except Organ Flute Voice,

Drum/SFX kits, and S. Articula

tion Voice

Deleting the recorded rhythm

channel (RHY 1, 2)

To delete a speciﬁc instrument

sound, simultaneously hold

down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) but-

ton (from the display where the

recorded channels are shown)

and press the appropriate key.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 69).

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

121

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Step Recording (EDIT)

The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime

Recording” (page 119).

In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step

Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 147),

with the exception of the points listed below:

• In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style

Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automati-

cally ﬁxed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style

based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automati-

cally set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step

Recording display.

Any desired chord or chord pro-

gression can be used for the

INTRO and ENDING sections.

Changing the Source Chord

If you want to record the pattern

with a Source Chord other than

CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and

PLAY CHORD parameters on the

PARAMETER page (page 127)

before recording.

Rules when recording non-rhythm channels

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE

channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD chan-

nels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appro-

priately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your per-

formance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the

Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above).

You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER dis-

play on page 127. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from

the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will

also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 128.

CRC CRC

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

122

• Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1–16 tab display; how-

ever, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel

in the BASIC tab display.

• In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can

be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the

[F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered.

Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY)

Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns

(channels) from existing internal Styles.

1 Select the basic Style, then call up the display for Style Assembly.

The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording”

(page 119). In step 4, select the ASSEMBLY tab.

Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style.

Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons

([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Change the section as

desired by using the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and execute the operation by

pressing the [8

] (OK) button.

3 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using

the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by

pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pat-

tern you want to replace in the Style Selection display.

To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style.

4 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step

3 above) by using the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (SECTION) buttons.

5 Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by

using the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels.

7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, and

save your data from the display (page 69).

You cannot select the SECTION

INTRO 4/ENDING 4 directly via

the panel operation.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 69).

Section display

Indicates the channels

that make up the section.

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

123

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing the Created Style

You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording

and/or Style Assembly.

Basic Operation for Editing Styles

1 Select a Style to be edited.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button.

4 Press the TAB[

√

][

] button to select a tab.

• Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 124

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the

rhythmic feel of your created Style.

• Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 126

The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize set-

tings for each channel in the Style data.

• Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 127

For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be con-

verted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the

chord section of the keyboard.

5 Edit the selected Style.

Playing the Style During Style Assembly

While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select

the method of playback. Use the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in

the Style Assembly display to select the playback method.

• SOLO

Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any

channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played

back simultaneously.

• ON

Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any chan-

nels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC

page are played back simultaneously.

• OFF

Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display.

Select the ﬁle to which the

data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed

ﬁle to which the data is to be

saved by pressing the [USB]/

[USER] buttons.

[USB]/[USER] → [B] STYLE →

[A]–[J]

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

124

Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)

The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic

Operation for Editing Styles” (page 123).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 125).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see page 125.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has

one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 69).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 69).

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

125

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

■ GROOVE

This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making

subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all

channels of the selected Style.

■ DYNAMICS

This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback.

The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected

Style.

ORIGINAL BEAT Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other

words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes;

if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL

BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when

ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,”

all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The

“16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT

is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats,

depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if

the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter

will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure

to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different

degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most

pronounced.

FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected

section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early,

while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered

settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats

up to the speciﬁed beat—but not including the ﬁrst beat—will be

played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is

selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types

produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied.

ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in

the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be

applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect.

EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than

100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% com-

press it.

BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values

above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100%

reduce it.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

126

Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)

The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 123).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level;

only the previous operation can be undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 69).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the save

operation.

QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 161), with the exception of the two

additional available parameters below.

Eighth notes with swing

Sixteenth notes with swing

VELOCITY

CHANGE

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel, accord-

ing to the percentage speciﬁed here.

BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of

measures to another location within the speciﬁed channel. SOURCE

speciﬁes the ﬁrst (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be

copied. DEST speciﬁes the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to

which the data is to be copied.

BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within

the selected channel.

REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel.

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

127

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER)

Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File

Format

The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 123).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 128).

Editing of Style File Format data

is related only to note conver-

sion. Editing the rhythm chan-

nels has no effect.

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single

uniﬁed format. By using the Style Creator, you can take

advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create

your own Styles.

The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the

Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm

track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator

feature.

• Source Pattern

There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback

notes, depending on the particular root note and chord

type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately con-

verted depending on the chord changes you make during

your performance. This basic Style data that you create

with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pat-

tern.”

• Note Transposition

This parameter group features two parameters that deter-

mine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con-

verted in response to chord changes.

• Other Settings

Using the parameters of this group, you can ﬁne-tune how

Style playback responds to the chords you play. For exam-

ple, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the

Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift-

ing the pitch to an authentic range—ensuring that no

notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru-

ment (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound).

Source Pattern

SOURCE ROOT

(Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern)

SOURCE CHORD

(Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern)

Note Transposition

NTR

(Note Transposition Rule applied to the

Chord Root change)

NTT

(Note Transposition Table applied to the

Chord Type change)

Chord change via the

chord section of the

keyboard.

Other Settings

HIGH KEY

(Upper limit of the octaves of the note

transposing caused by the Chord Root

change)

NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the

note is sounded)

RTR

(Retrigger Rules that determine how

notes held through chord changes will be

handled)

Output

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

128

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 69).

■ SOURCE ROOT/CHORD

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used

when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C”

and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is

deleted prior to recording a new Style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord

included in the preset data. When you change Source Root/Chord from the default

CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change,

depending on the newly selected chord type.

When the Source Root is C:

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted

from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes.

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation.

Auditioning Your Style with a

Speciﬁc Chord

Normally in the Style Creator,

you can hear your original Style-

in-process with the Source Pat-

tern. However, there is a way to

hear it played by a speciﬁc chord

and root. To do this, set NTR to

“Root Fixed,” NTT to “Bypass,”

and NTT BASS to “OFF” then

change the newly displayed

“Play Root” and “Play Chord”

parameters to the desired set-

tings.

ROOT TRANS

(Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the

pitch relationship between notes is

maintained. For example, the notes

C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become

F3, A3 and C4 when they are trans-

posed to F. Use this setting for chan-

nels that contain melody lines.

ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to

the previous note range. For example,

the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of

C become C3, F3 and A3 when they

are transposed to F. Use this setting for

channels that contain chord parts.

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

(9)

CR CC

(11)

CR C CR

CmM

CC RC

(9)

CCC

CC RC C

CmM

(9)

CCR

Cdim

CR R RC

CCR

Cdim

CCC C

(9)

CRC

CRC CR

(#11)

CCC

C sus

CRC CR

CRC C CR

CCC C CR

(9)

CCC C RC

(9)

CRC

RCR

Caug

CRC C RC

CRC C CR

(#11)

CCC CR

add9

CRC CC

(13)

CCC

(b9)

1+8

1+5

CCC

RCC

(#9)

CRC

RCC

C aug

CRC CRR

CM aug

CCCR

RCC

(b13)

CR CC

Csus

CCR CR

Csus

C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes

When playing a

C major chord.

When playing an F

major chord.

When playing a C

major chord.

When playing an

F major chord.

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

129

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

■ NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern.

■ NTT BASS ON/OFF

The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note,

when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.

■ HIGH KEY

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord

root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed

down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR param-

eter (page 128) is set to “Root Trans.”

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not

do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table

used only converts the root note.

MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels

such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

CHORD

Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2

channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.

MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the

chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is

raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody

channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such

as Intros and Endings.

MELODIC MINOR

5th

In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern.

HARMONIC

MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are

not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC

MINOR 5th

In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

NATURAL MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third,

ﬂatted sixth and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other

notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which

respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

NATURAL MINOR

5th

In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes

are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and dimin-

ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4

F#M

F#2-A#2-C#3

C#M

C#3-F3-G#3

Example—When the highest key is F.

Root changes

Notes played

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

130

■ NOTE LIMIT

This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound

as realistic as possible—in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are

sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). The actual notes that

sound are automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change

pitch in response to chord changes.

STOP The notes stop sounding.

PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type

of the new chord.

PITCH SHIFT TO

ROOT

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root

of the new chord.

RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding

to the next chord.

RETRIGGER TO

ROOT

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next

chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4

C#M

F3-G#3-C#4

Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4.

Root changes

Notes played

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

131

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups—Registration Memory

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all

panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your cus-

tom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Reg-

istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (ﬁle).

Registering and Saving Custom

Panel Setups

Registering Custom Panel Setups

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as

desired.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered

with the Registration Memory function.

2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display

for selecting the items to be registered appears.

Only the items selected here will be registered.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button.

4 Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine

whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the

ππ

††

] button.

5 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register

your settings.

It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or

green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup

data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION

MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced

by the new settings.

6 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps #1–

#5.

When recalling registration set-

ups, you can also select the

items to be recalled or not, even

if you selected all items when

registering (page 133).

About the lamp status:

Off.............. no data registered

On (green)...data registered, but

not currently selected

On (red)......data registered, and

currently selected

Deleting an unneeded panel

setup

See page 133.

Deleting all eight current

panel setups

To delete all the eight current

panel setups, turn the [POWER]

button ON while holding the B6

key (right-most B key on the key-

board).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

132

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Saving the Registered Panel Setups

You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory

Bank ﬁle.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 69).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank.

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registra-

tion Memory section.

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

Bank 4

strat

emory

ata

compatibility

In general, Registration Memory

data (Bank ﬁles) is compatible

among the models CVP-409/

407/405/403/401. However, the

data may not be perfectly com-

patible, depending on the speci-

ﬁcations of each model.

out reca

lli

ng setups

rom a

USB storage device

When recalling the setups includ-

ing Song/Style ﬁle selection from

a USB storage device, make sure

that the appropriate USB storage

device including the registered

Song/Style is connected into the

[USB TO DEVICE] Terminal.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them

selectable only via the panel controls—in other words, instead of via Registration

Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming MIDI data, etc.

Call up the Parameter Lock display ([FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

]

CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK). Select the desired parameter by

using the [1

π†

]–[7

π†

] buttons, then lock it with the [8

] button.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

133

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup

The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited.

3 Press the [8

††

] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis-

play.

4 Edit the panel setups.

• Deleting a panel setup

Press the [5

†

] button to delete a panel setup (page 71).

• Renaming a panel setup

Press the [1

†

] button to rename a panel setup (page 72).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK

Selection display.

Disabling Recall of Speciﬁc Items (Freeze Func-

tion)

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single

button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain

the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may

want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment

Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the set-

tings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Regis-

tration Memory buttons.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] FREEZE

The number above

the ﬁle name corre-

sponds to the

REGISTRATION

MEMORY [1]–[8]

buttons.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

134

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

3 Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain

unchanged), by pressing the [8

ππ

††

] button.

4 Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function

on.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in

Order—Registration Sequence

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a

performance when you want to quickly switch between settings—without having

to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence func-

tion lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons or the pedal as you play.

1 Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence

(page 132).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings,

specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse

through the sequence.

Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.

Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.

4 Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves

when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END).

STOP .....................Pressing the TAB [

] button or the “advance” pedal has

no effect. The sequence is “stopped.”

TOP .......................The sequence starts again at the beginning.

NEXT BANK...........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of

the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder.

5 Program the Sequence order.

The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel.

Program the Sequence order from left to right.

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

FREEZE display are automati-

cally saved to the instrument

when you exit from this dis-

play. However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

135

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the

panel, then press the [6

ππ

††

] (INSERT) button to input the number.

• Replacing the number

Press the [5

π†

] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor

position with the currently selected Registration Memory number.

• Deleting the number

Press the [7

π†

] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor

position.

• Deleting all numbers

Press the [8

π†

] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence.

6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on.

7 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button to

return to the Main display and conﬁrm whether the Registration

Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence pro-

grammed above.

• Use the TAB [

] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the

order of the sequence, or use the TAB [

√

] button to call them up in

reverse order. The TAB [

√

] [

] buttons can only be used for Registration

Sequence when the Main display is called up.

• When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select

the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Reg-

istration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the dis-

play in step 3 above).

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings

The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the

Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. To store your newly programmed Registration

Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 69).

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE display are auto-

matically saved to the instru-

ment when you exit from this

display. However, if you turn

the power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Returning to the ﬁrst

Sequence in one action

In the Main display, press the

TAB [

√

] and [

] buttons simul-

taneously. This cancels the cur-

rently selected Sequence

number (the box indicator at the

top right goes out). The ﬁrst

Sequence will be selected by

pressing one of the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons or by pressing the pedal.

The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of

the Main display, letting you conﬁrm the currently selected

number.

CAUTION

Keep in mind that all Registra-

tion Sequence data is lost

when changing Registration

Memory Banks, unless you’ve

saved it with the Registration

Memory Bank ﬁle.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

136

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Compatible Song Types

The instrument can play back the following Song types.

Preset Songs

Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display.

Your Own Recorded Songs

These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 42, page 143) and saved to the

USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect an USB storage device

such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.)

Commercially Available Song Data

Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk

Songs are available when you connect the optional ﬂoppy disk drive to the instru-

ment. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (ﬂoppy disks) that bear the

following marks:

Reference to Quick Guide Pages

Practicing with the Preset Songs .................................................. page 35

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing ..................................... page 35

Displaying Music Notation (Score) ......................................... page 38

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ........................... page 39

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ......................... page 41

Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42

Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own

Performance ............................................................................page 54

Connecting a Microphone...................................................... page 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ................................................ page 55

Displaying Text ....................................................................... page 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................................... page 56

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance ................................................................... page 58

Recording Your Performance as Audio ..................................... page 60

Before using a USB storage

device, be sure to read “Han-

dling the USB Storage Device

(USB Flash Memory/Floppy

Disk, etc)” on page 22.

Before using a ﬂoppy disk and

the disk slot, be sure to read

“Handling the Floppy Disk Drive

(FDD) and Floppy Disks” on

page 21.

Commercially available music

data is subject to protection by

mercially available data is strictly

prohibited, except for your own

personal use.

See page 199 for information on

the types of Song data that can

be played on the instrument.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

137

Operations for Song Playback

This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback

which are not covered in the “Quick Guide.”

■ Starting/Stopping a Song

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Song playback, and press the SONG

[STOP] button to stop. In addition, there are several other convenient ways to start/

stop a Song.

Starting Playback

Synchro Start

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

When playback is stopped, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP] button

and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP]

button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button once again.

•Tap function

This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo

and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release)

the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro

Start standby mode, and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you

tapped.

Fade In

The Fade In function can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the

Song. To produce fade-ins, press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out

while playback is stopped and then press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start

playback. For information on the settings, see page 191.

Stopping Playback

Fade Out

The Fade Out function can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping

the Song playback. Press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out at the

beginning of the phrase you want to fade out. For information on the settings, see

page 191.

Depending on the particular

Song data, the Style will also

play back at the same time.

Set the Fade In/Out time

The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details,

refer to page 109.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

138

■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward

Moving to the top position of the Song

Press the SONG [STOP] button, regardless of whether the Song is stopped or play-

ing back.

Pausing the Song

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during Song playback. Press the SONG

[PLAY/PAUSE] button again and the Song will resume from the current position.

Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)

1 Press the SONG [REW] or SONG [FF] button to move back and forth

(rewind and fast forward).

It calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number in the

Main display.

For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can use the [FF] or [REW] buttons

to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song. If you don’t want to set the

Song position by the phrase marks, press the [E] button and select “BAR” in

the window showing the Song position.

2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the cur-

rent measure number (or Phrase Mark number).

■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I]

buttons. The available parameters are shown below.

Phrase Mark:

Phrase Mark is a pre-pro-

grammed marker in certain Song

data, which speciﬁes a certain

location (set of measures) in the

Song.

The preset Songs in the “Follow

Lights” folder contain the Guide

settings. These Songs are inap-

propriate for use with ALL or

RANDOM repeat.

REPEAT MODE OFF

Plays through the selected Song, then stops.

SINGLE

Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.

ALL

Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder

containing the current Song repeatedly.

RANDOM

Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the

folder containing the current Song.

PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can set Repeat

Playback to “ON” or “OFF.” When this is on, the part corre-

sponding to the speciﬁed Phrase Mark number is repeatedly

played back. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark num-

ber are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving

back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above).

For Songs not containing

Phrase Marks

For Songs containing

Phrase Mark

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

139

■ Queuing the Next Playback Song

While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is

convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance.

Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is

playing back.

The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name.

To cancel this setting, press the [8

†

] (Cancel) button.

■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the

Song Playback

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song

data are replaced with style channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment

parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as

shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same

time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Select a Style (page 45).

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the

Auto Accompaniment function.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby—

letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you

start playing.

5 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

6 Play chords along with the Song.

The chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main dis-

play, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button.

When the Song playback is stopped, the style playback is also stopped at the same

time.

•Tempo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in

the Song is automatically used.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parame-

ters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.)

to make them selectable only via

the panel controls (page 132).

If the Song data does not contain

this data, the current chord name

will not be displayed in the Main

display during Song playback.

Playing Songs with the Quick Start function

With the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some

commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song

(such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the ﬁrst measure,

before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instru-

ment reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible

speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the ﬁrst

note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a mini-

mum pause for reading of data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” a Song is

played back directly from the ﬁrst note (which may be in the middle of a

measure). If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has

silence prior to the ﬁrst note, turn Quick Start “OFF.”

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Press the [7

††

] (QUICK START) button to turn the Quick Start

“OFF.”

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

140

Adjusting the Volume Balance and

Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING

CONSOLE)

You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song. Refer to the section “Adjust-

able items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 90. Call up the

“SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in

“Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on

page 88. Below are two operation examples.

Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

3 Select the [VOL VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display

of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.”

5 Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME.”

6 Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1

ππ

††

]–

ππ

††

] buttons.

7 You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation

of the SETUP (page 162).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOLUME” item in step 2 of the Setup proce-

dure.

Reading Song data automatically when connecting a USB stor-

age device

You can have the instrument automatically call up the ﬁrst Song (not con-

tained in a folder) on a USB storage device, as soon as the device is con-

nected in the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

2 Press the [3

ππ

]/[4

ππ

] (SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON”.

About the [SONG CH 1–8]/

[SONG CH 9–16] displays

A Song consists of 16 separate

channels. Separate settings can

be made for each of the 16 chan-

nels in the MIXING CONSOLE

display. Adjust the parameters in

the SONG CH 1–8 or SONG CH

9–16 display respectively. Usu-

ally, CH 1 is assigned to the

[TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is

assigned to the [TRACK 2] but-

ton, and CH 3–16 are assigned

to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button,

respectively.

Press the [C]/[H] (VOICE) but-

tons in step 5 to select the Voice

which you want to change. Then,

press one of the [1

π†

] to [8

π†

] buttons to call up the

Voice selection display for the

channel.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

141

Changing Voices

1–4 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume

Balance of Each Channel” (see page 140).

5 Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE”.

6 Press one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to call up the Voice selec-

tion display for the channel.

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

8 You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup

operation (page 162).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure.

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play.

Also, when you sing along with a Song playback using a connected microphone,

the instrument automatically adjusts the timing of the Song playback to match your

vocal performance.

To use the practice function, press the [GUIDE] button.

Selecting the Guide Function Type

1 Call up the setting display:

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The

following types are available.

Saving the Guide settings in

the SONG SETTING display

You can save the Guide settings

as a part of the Song data

(page 162). For Songs to which

Guide settings have been saved,

the Guide function will be auto-

matically turned on and the

related settings will be recalled

when the Song is selected.

Turning the keyboard guide

lamps off

Press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) but-

ton in the SONG SETTING dis-

play (in step 1 as described at

left) to turn the keyboard guide

lamps off.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

142

For Keyboard Performance

Follow lights

With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play

(page 39). Song playback pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the cor-

rect notes, Song playback continues.

Any key

With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key

(any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to

play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music (any key is OK)

and the Song playback continues.

For Karaoke

Karao-key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger, while

you sing along.

Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard

(any key is OK) and the Song playback continues. (For this function, the notes of

the keyboard do not sound.)

Vocal CueTIME

This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch.

Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. When you sing with proper pitch,

Song playback continues.

Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps

light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING)

Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 1 (page 141) to

select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light.

JUST........................... The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the

same timing you should play.

NEXT ......................... The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music,

indicating the notes you should play next. The

guide lamps ﬂash if you fail to play the keys with

the correct timing.

If the guide lamps do not light as intended

The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and

2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included).

If the guide lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the

appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively, by

using the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons in the SONG SETTING display as

described in step 1 on the previous page.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

143

Recording Your Performance

You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a

USB storage device. Several different recording methods are available:

Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly,

Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple

channels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. You can also

edit the Songs you’ve recorded.

For details on MIDI Recording, see page 196.

For details on USB Audio Recording, see page 60.

Recording Methods

There are three methods as shown below.

You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 158).

For example, you can edit speciﬁc notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/

Out function to re-record a speciﬁc part.

Turning playback channels of the Song on and off

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each

channel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to

[TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TRACK 2] button, and CH 3–16 are

assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL

ON/OFF display.

If the display shown below does not appear, press the [CHANNEL ON/

OFF] button again.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to turn each channel on or off.

If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other chan-

nels), press and hold down one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons corresponding

to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again.

The microphone input signal can

not be recorded.

Internal memory (User tab

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 3.2MB.

This capacity applies to all ﬁle

types, including Voice, Style,

Song, and Registration data ﬁles.

Quick Recording

➤ page 144

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly

record your performance—useful, for example, in recording solo

piano pieces. You can record to the [TRACK 1 (R)] or [TRACK 2

(L)] button, and also to the [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] track,

which can be used for recording at the same time.

Multi track Recording

➤ page 145

This lets you record a whole Song including several different

instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra.

Record the performance of each instrument part one by one

and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record

over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or

a Song on USB storage device) with your own performance.

Step Recording

➤ page 147

This method lets you compose your performance by “writing”

it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual

recording method – similar to writing music notation onto

paper. You can input notes, chords and other events one by

one (realtime performance is not needed).

ecor

tep

ecor

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

144

Quick Recording

This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance.

1 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance.

Below are some example settings you may want to try.

• Recording the RIGHT 1 part

Select the voice for the RIGHT 1 part by calling up the Voice selection dis-

play (page 32).

• Recording the Dual voice (RIGHT 1 and 2 parts)

Turn on the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button (page 80). Select the

voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2) by calling up the Voice selec-

tion display (page 32).

• Recording the LEFT part

Turn on the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button (page 81). Select the

voice for the LEFT part by calling up the Voice selection display (page 32).

• Recording Styles

1 Select a Style (page 45).

2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons, as

necessary.

• Using Registration Memory panel setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons.

3 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG TRACK but-

tons to be recorded.

• Recording your performance

Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)] button for the right-hand part recording,

and/or the SONG [TRACK 2 (L)] button for the left-hand part recording.

• Recording Styles

Press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

• Recording your performance and the Style playback simultaneously

Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons and the

SONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

The RIGHT and/or LEFT parts are

recorded onto separate tracks.

With Multi Track Recording, you

can record RIGHT 2 part individ-

ually.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

145

4 Start recording.

There are several different ways you can start recording.

• Starting by playing the keyboard

If you’ve selected the SONG [TRACK 1(R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons in step 3

above, play in the right-hand section of the keyboard (page 79). If you’ve

selected the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] button in step 3 above,

play in the left-hand (chord) section of the keyboard (page 111). Record-

ing begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard.

• Starting by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button

If you start recording in this way, “empty” data is recorded until you play a

note on the keyboard. This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or

two-beat pick-up or lead-in.

• Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and

recording starts simultaneously.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message prompting you to save the recorded

performance data appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button.

See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button to play back the performance you just recorded.

7 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

Multi Track Recording

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to

each channel independently, one by one. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be

recorded.

1 Press the SONG[REC] and

SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up

for recording.

Select Voices for recording the keyboard

parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT)

(page 32, page 80, page 81). Select a Style

for recording also, as necessary (page 45).

Using the metronome

You can record your perfor-

mance while playing back the

metronome (page 30). But the

metronome sound is not

recorded.

Pausing and restarting your

recording

To pause recording, press the

SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button

during recording. To restart

recording, follow the operations

shown below.

•For recording to [TRACK 1]/

[TRACK 2] recording, press the

SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

•For recording to [EXTRA

TRACKS (STYLES)] recording,

press the STYLE CONTROL

[SYNC START] button, then

play in the chord section of the

keyboard.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

About Channels

See page 147.

Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2

part to the channel 2

Turn the PART ON/OFF [DUAL

(RIGHT2)] button on. Then, call up

Voice Selection display, and select a

voice for the RIGHT 2 part (page 80).

Example

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

146

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button,

press the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to

set the desired channels to “REC”.

Normally, the keyboard parts should be

recorded to channels 1–8, and the Styles

should be recorded to channels 9–16. To

cancel the channel selection, press the

SONG [REC] button again.

3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the

desired part for the channel to be

recorded.

This determines which part—keyboard or

Style (Rhythm 1/2, Bass, etc.)—is recorded

to each of the channels selected in step 2.

Default channel/part assignments are

shown in the section “About Song chan-

nels” (page 147).

To close PART selection display, press the

[EXIT] button.

4 Start recording.

The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording (page 145).

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message appears prompting you to save the

recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] but-

ton. For instructions on saving Song data, see step 8.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button to playback the performance you just recorded.

7 To record another channel, repeat steps 2 through 6.

Sett

ng a

e 9–16 c

an-

nels to “REC” simultaneously

While holding the SONG [REC]

button, press the SONG [EXTRA

TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

When selecting the MIDI part

• Setting a single channel to

MIDI

All incoming data received via

any of the MIDI channels 1–16

is recorded. When using an

external MIDI keyboard or

controller to record, this lets

you record without having to

set the MIDI transmit channel

on the external device.

• Setting several channels to

MIDI

When using an external MIDI

keyboard or controller to

record, this records data only

over the set MIDI channel—

meaning the external device

must also be set to the same

channel.

Recording each channel with

the same tempo

Use the Metronome function

(page 30) to record each channel

with the same tempo. Keep in

mind that the metronome sound

is not recorded.

Pausing and restarting your

recording

See page 145.

While holding the SONG [REC] but-

ton, press the [2

] button to set the

channel 2 to “REC”.

Press the [D] button to select

the “RIGHT2”.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

147

8 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

Step Recording

This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords.

Basic Operations for Step Recording

1 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

About Song channels

Default channel/part assignments are shown below.

About keyboard parts

There are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the

default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–8. Nor-

mally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–8.

About Style parts

As the default, each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16,

respectively as shown below. Normally, the Style parts should be recorded

to the channels 9–16.

RHYTHM ......... This is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum and

percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits

is used.

BASS ................ The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds

to match the style.

CHORD ........... This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with

piano or guitar Voices.

PAD ................. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings,

organ, choir, etc.

PHRASE ........... This part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated

chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment

more interesting.

RIGHT1

RHYTHM1

RHYTHM2

BASS

CHORD1

CHORD2

PAD

PHRASE1

PHRASE2

Channels ChannelsDefault Parts Keyboard parts

Keyboard Parts

Style parts

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

148

3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display for recording/

editing a Song.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

For recording melodies .............. Select the [1–16] tab.

For recording chords .................. Select the [CHORD] tab.

5 If you select the “1–16” tab in step 4, press the [F] button to select the

channel for recording.

6 Press the [G] button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

7 Start Step Recording.

For recording melodies .............. See page 149.

For recording chords .................. See page 156.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

149

Recording Melodies

This section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step

Recording” on page 148.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

5 Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, according to the

notation example.

Since the music score displayed

on the instrument is generated

from the recorded MIDI data, it

may not appear exactly the same

as shown below.

About the items which can be

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Example 1

6 7

3–5

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera-

tion step numbers.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

150

6 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to enter a quarter-note rest.

To enter the rest, use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons. (Press the button once to

select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having spec-

iﬁed note length will be entered.

7 Play the C4 key.

8 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

Move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

Press the SONG [STOP] button

during recording.

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 148) to

select the data you want to delete.

2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

151

About velocity

Velocity is determined by how

strongly you play the keyboard.

The more strongly you play the

keyboard, the higher the velocity

value and the louder the sound.

The velocity value can be speci-

ﬁed within a range from 1 to

127. The higher the velocity

value, the louder the sound

becomes.

About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons

in the Step Record display

[G] button ........... Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to

be entered.

[H] button ........... Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to

be entered.

[I] button ............. Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing the

button alternately switches the note selectors (at the

bottom of the display) among three basic note values:

normal, dotted and triplet.

Kbd.Vel

fff

ppp

127

111

Items Velocity to be recorded

Actual velocity you play the keyboard with

Normal

Tenuto

Staccato

Staccatissimo

Manual

80%

99%

40%

20%

Items Gate time to be recorded

The gate time (note length) can be set to any

desired percentage by using the [DATA

ENTRY] dial.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

152

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the operation.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

5 While holding F3 on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Before you go on to step 6, release the F3 key and the [7

ππ

††

] button.

6 Press the [H] button to select the “Staccato”.

7 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth-note length.

Example 2

2–5 10–13 14–16

6–8

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation

step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

153

8 Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation exam-

ple.

9 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

10 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

11 Press the [I] button to select “dotted.”

12 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the dotted half-note length.

13 Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

14 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

15 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

16 Play the F3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

17 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

18 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

19 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 158).

20 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

17 18

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

154

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the entire operations.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.”

2 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth note.

4 While holding C3 key on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following

steps.

Example 3

1–4

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following

operation step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 151.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

155

5 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

]

button.

Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing

the following steps.

6 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys yet. Keep holding them while exe-

cuting the following steps.

7 While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button, and successively press the [5

ππ

††

] button.

After you press the [5

ππ

††

] button, release the keys.

8 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

156

Recording Chords

You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time

with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using

the Step Record function.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 148.

1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF,

then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button.

2 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

3 Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button.

CF GFG7 C

2,3 5,6 8,9

147

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step

numbers.

MAIN A

BREAK

MAIN B

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

157

5 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

6 Play the chords F, and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard.

7 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button.

8 Press the [4

ππ

††

] button to select the whole-note length.

9 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.

10 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

11 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

12 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 158).

13 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change

data into the Song data.

14 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be

deleted (page 150).

Entering ﬁll-ins

Turn the STYLE CONTROL

[AUTO FILL IN] button to ON,

and simply press one of the

STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARI-

ATION (A, B, C, D)] buttons.

(The appropriate ﬁll-in section

plays and then automatically

goes to the selected [MAIN

VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern

playback.)

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

158

Editing a Recorded Song

You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method—Quick

Recording, Multi Track Recording, or Step Recording.

Basic Editing Operation

1 Select a Song for editing.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record

or edit Songs.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons and edit

the Song.

• Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section

—Punch In/Out (REC MODE) ............................................... page 159

This lets you re-record a speciﬁc section of a Song.

• Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) .................................... page 160

This lets you edit the channel events. For example, you can delete data or

transpose notes by channel.

• Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) .................... page 163

This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords.

• Editing System Event (SYS/EX.) ........................................... page 165

This lets you change the tempo or the time signature.

• Editing Lyrics (LYRICS).......................................................... page 166

This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

159

Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section—Punch In/

Out (REC MODE)

When re-recording a speciﬁc section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch

IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and

the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind

that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over,

although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out

timing. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers

beforehand for automatic operation, or manually execute the Punch In/Out record-

ing by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard.

The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Edit-

ing Operation” on page 158.

1 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings for re-

recording (see below).

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track but-

ton.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the key-

board at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out

point.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

■ PUNCH IN settings

■ PUNCH OUT settings

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro

Standby mode.

FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as

soon as you play the keyboard.

PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indi-

cated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that

point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3

π†

]

button.

REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as

the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the

point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the

speciﬁed Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display

button), at which point recording stops and normal playback

continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which

recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by

pressing the [6

π†

] buttons.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

160

Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings

This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function.

The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures

in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings

Pedal Punch In/Out operation

may be reversed depending on

the particular pedal you've con-

nected to the instrument. If nec-

essary, change the pedal polarity

to reverse the control (page 191).

When this is set to ON, you can use the sostenuto pedal to control the punch-in

and punch-out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the

sostenuto pedal instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal

stops recording (Punch Out).You can press and release the sostenuto pedal as often

as you want during playback, to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the

current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled when the Pedal

Punch In/Out function is set to ON.

Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL)

The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic

Editing Operation on page 158.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 161).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For information on the available parameters, see page 161.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the cur-

rent display.

After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is com-

pleted, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data

if you are not satisﬁed with the Operation results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the immediate operation can be undone.

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

1234567

PUNCH IN setting

PUNCH OUT setting

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

Original data

Start overwrite recording

Play back (Original data)

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Play back (Original data)

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2, start recording from measure 3

*2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5.

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

161

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

■ QUANTIZE menu

The Quantize function allows you to align

the timing of all the notes in a channel. For

example, if you record the musical phrase

shown at right, you may not play it with

absolute precision, and your performance

may have been slightly ahead of or behind

the precise timing. Quantize is a conve-

nient way of correcting for this.

■ Deleting the data of the speciﬁed channel (DELETE menu)

You can delete the data of the speciﬁed channel in the Song. Select the channel

whose data to be deleted by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons, then press the [D]

(EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

About Quantize size (resolu-

tion)

The Quantize size or resolution

is the number of clocks per quar-

ter note.

CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized.

SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the

Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth

notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize

size.

Settings

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally conve-

nient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same

time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are

contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all

notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely elimi-

nating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet

setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% pro-

duces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved

toward the speciﬁed quantization beats according to the speciﬁed percentage.

Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human”

feel in the recording.

After eighth note quantization

quarter

note

eighth note sixteenth

note

thirty-second

note

sixteenth note

+ eighth note

triplet*

quarter

note triplet

eighth note

triplet

sixteenth

note triplet

eighth note

+ eighth

note triplet*

sixteenth

note + six-

teenth triplet*

Quarter-note length

Original data

Quantizing strength=100

Quantizing strength=50

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

162

■ Mixing (merging) the data of the speciﬁed two channels (MIX menu)

This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a

different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another.

■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down

by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

To display the channels 9–16

Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays—Channels 1–8,

and Channels 9–16.

Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously

While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button, press one of the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

SETUP menu

The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 88) displays and other panel set-

tings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing

Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the

Song starts.

■ Setup recording procedure

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [A] SONG CREATOR → TAB

[

√

][

] CHANNEL → [B] SET UP

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings to be

automatically called up when the Song starts.

3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8

ππ

] button.

SOURCE 1 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel.

SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel. In addi-

tion to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you

to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. If

“COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the

destination channel. (The original channel data is maintained.)

DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be

placed.

SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing

Console.

KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the

keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status.

Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to

the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a

Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the

top position of the Song).

SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display.

GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide

ON/OFF setting.

LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display.

MIC SETTING Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the

Mixing Console display (page 88).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

163

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording oper-

ation.

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving

your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69).

Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16)

The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the

Basic Editing Operation on page 158.

1 When the 1–16 tab display is selected, press the [F] button to select

the channel to be edited.

2 Move the cursor to the desired data.

To move the cursor up or down ..............................Use the [A]/[B] button.

To move the cursor to the top data..........................Press the [C] button.

To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units ....Use the [1

π†

]–

π†

] buttons.

3 Edit the data.

Editing the data line by line

Use the [6

π†

]–[8

] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the

events.

Editing each parameter of the data

1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited.

2 Use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

] buttons to edit the parameter value. The

[DATA ENTRY] dial can also be used. To actually enter an edited

value, simply move the cursor away from the parameter.

To restore the original value, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button before move

the cursor.

4 When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) but-

ton to convert the data into Song data.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

Selecting multiple lines of

data

While holding the [J] (MULTI

SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B]

buttons.

Displaying speciﬁc types of

event (FILTER)

You can select the event types to

be displayed in the [CHORD]

and [1-16] tab displays. This is

convenient, for example, when

you wish to have only the note

events shown (page 165).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

The data recorded by Realtime

Recording will not appear on the

display and cannot be edited.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

164

About Clock

A unit of note resolution. The

Quantize size is the number of

clocks per quarter note. On the

instrument, one clock is equal to

1/1920th of a quarter note.

About the events shown in the display

12 3

001 : 1 : 1440

Example

Measure number (BAR)

Beat

Clock

1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Same as the indication

at the lower left of the display.

2 Indicates the event types (see below).

3 Indicates the event values.

Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display

Event types shown on the CHORD tab display

Note The individual note of a Song. Includes the note number

which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a

velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the

gate time value (the length of a note).

Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, ﬁlter and

effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on

page 88), etc.

Prog

(Program Change)

MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.

P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously.

A.T. (Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key

after the note is played.

Style Style

Tempo tempo

Chord chord root, chord type, on bass chord

Sect Accompaniment Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break,

Ending)

OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment

Style

CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

165

Displaying Speciﬁc Types of Events (FILTER)

In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difﬁcult

to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in

handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays.

1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays.

2 Select the event type by using the [2

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by

using the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

[H] (ALL ON)..............Checkmarks for all event types.

[I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects only NOTE/CHORD data.

[J] (INVERT) ................Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that

were previously unchecked and vice versa.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.

Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below.

MAIN .........................Call up the Main Filter display.

CTRL CHG .................Call up the Control Change Filter display.

STYLE .........................Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display.

Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.)

The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit-

ing Operation on page 158.

From this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not

belong to a speciﬁc channel, such as tempo and beat (time signature). The opera-

tions here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 163.

System Events

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your

data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 69).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time Signature) Determines the time signature.

Key (Key Signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor set-

ting, for the music score shown on the display.

XGPrm (XG Parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parame-

ters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the separate Data List

booklet for details.

SysEx (System exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind

that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the

data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the

data.

Meta (Meta Event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that

you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data

here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

166

Editing Lyrics (LYRICS)

The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing

Operation on page 158. From this display, you can edit the recorded Lyrics events.

The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 163.

Lyrics Events

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

1 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics

editing display.

Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 72).

2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 69).

Name Allows you to enter the Song name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Control Codes CR

Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

Unavailable on the instrument. On some MIDI devices, this

event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the

next set of lyrics.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 69).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

167

Using a Microphone

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

This section explains brieﬂy how to create your own Vocal Harmony (page 57)

types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. Up to ten Vocal Harmony types

can be created and saved.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [H] (VOCAL HARMONY TYPE) button to call up the VOCAL

HARMONY TYPE selection display.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own

Performance.................................................................................. page 54

Connecting a Microphone...........................................................page 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ...................................................page 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ..............................................page 56

Adjusting the tempo ................................................................ page 31

Transpose ................................................................................ page 56

Applying effects to Your Voice ................................................. page 56

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice..................................... page 57

Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME)........... page 142

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own

Performance................................................................................. page 58

Changing the Key (Transpose).................................................. page 58

Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV .... page 59

Making Announcements Between Songs ................................. page 59

Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ......... page 142

Using a Microphone

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

168

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be

edited.

4 Press the [8

††

] (EDIT) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT

display.

5 If you want to re-select the Vocal Harmony type, use the [1

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

Or you can re-select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the [8

π†

]

(RETURN) button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display.

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons to select the parameter (page 169)

you want to edit.

7 Set the value of the parameter selected above.

8 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type

(page 69).

567

CAUTION

The settings here will be lost

if you change to another

Vocal Harmony type or you

turn the power off without

executing the save operation.

Using a Microphone

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

169

Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display

VOCODER TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro-

phone sound when the Harmony mode (page 173) is set to

“VOCODER.”

CHORDAL TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro-

phone sound when the Harmony mode (page 173) is set to

“CHORDAL.”

HARMONY GENDER TYPE Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is

changed or not.

Off

The gender of the harmony sound is not changed.

Auto

The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically.

LEAD GENDER TYPE Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound

(i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. Please note

that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the

selected type. When set to Off, three harmony notes are pro-

duced. Other settings produce two harmony notes.

Off

No gender change occurs.

Unison

No gender change occurs. You can adjust the LEAD GENDER

DEPTH below.

Male

The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal.

Female

The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal.

LEAD GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. This is available

when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off.

The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice

becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

LEAD PITCH CORRECT This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE

above is set to other than Off.

When Smooth or Hard is selected, the pitch of the lead vocal is

shifted in precise semitone steps.

UPPER GENDER THRESH-

OLD

Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or

exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones above the lead vocal

pitch.

LOWER GENDER THRESH-

OLD

Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or

exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones below the lead vocal

pitch.

UPPER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes

higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the

value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The

lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

LOWER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes

lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the

value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The

lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also

affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE

above is set to other than Off.

VIBRATO RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Also affects the lead vocal

sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than

Off.

VIBRATO DELAY Speciﬁes the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins

when a note is produced. Higher values result in a longer delay.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

170

Adjusting the Microphone and Har-

mony Sound

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SET-

TING display.

HARMONY1/2/3 VOLUME Sets the volume of the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest)

harmony notes.

HARMONY1/2/3 PAN Speciﬁes the stereo (pan) position of the ﬁrst (lowest), second,

and third (highest) harmony notes.

Random

The stereo position of the sound will change randomly when-

ever the keyboard is played. This is effective when the Har-

mony mode (page 173) is set to “VOCODER” or “CHORDAL.”

L63>R – C – L<R63

A setting of L63>R pans the sound hard left, while C is at cen-

ter, and L<R63 is at hard right.

HARMONY1/2/3 DETUNE Detunes the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony

notes by the speciﬁed number of cents.

PITCH TO NOTE When this is set to “ON,” you can “play” the voices of the instru-

ment with your voice. (The instrument tracks the pitch of your

voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator. Keep in

mind, however, that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect

the volume of the tone generator.)

PITCH TO NOTE PART Determines which of the instrument parts will be controlled by

the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is “ON.”

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

171

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display.

4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the item (parameter) (see below) to

be adjusted.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play.

Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the OVERALL SETTING Tab

Display

■ 3BAND EQ

EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple

bands, which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency

response. The instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH)

digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

•Hz

Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.

•dB

Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

■ NOISE GATE

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below

a speciﬁed level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired sig-

nal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

• SW (Switch)

This turns the Noise Gate on or off.

• TH. (Threshold)

This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

CAUTION

Settings in the OVERALL SET-

TING tab display are automat-

ically saved to the instrument

when you exit from the dis-

play. However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

172

■ COMPRESSOR

This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone

exceeds a speciﬁed level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that

have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft

parts louder and loud parts softer.

• SW (Switch)

This turns the Compressor on or off.

• TH. (Threshold)

This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied.

•RATIO

This adjusts the compression ratio.

• OUT

This adjusts the ﬁnal output level.

■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL

The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.

• VOCODER CONTROL

The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode (page 173) is controlled by note

data—the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. This

parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony.

• BAL.

This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal

Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and

decreases that of the lead vocal.

When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal

Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output.

SONG CHANNEL MUTE/PLAY

When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below (to control

Harmony) is muted (turned off) during song playback.

OFF/Channels 1–16

When set to “OFF,” song data control over harmony is turned

off. When set to one of the values 1–16, note data (played

from a song on the instrument or an external MIDI sequencer)

contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the

harmony. This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in

the SONG SETTING display (page 141).

KEYBOARD OFF

Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.

UPPER

Notes played to the right of the split point control the har-

mony.

LOWER

Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

173

• MODE

All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes, which produce har-

mony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal

Harmony mode, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to

your voice. The three modes are described below.

• CHORD

The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for

chord detection.

•Vocal Range

Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony, depending on your voice.

■ MIC

The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.

• MUTE

When set to ON, the microphone sound is turned off.

• VOLUME

Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound.

AUTO When the [ACMP ON/OFF] or [LEFT] is set to ON and if chord

data exists in the song, the mode is automatically set to

CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.

VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the

keyboard and/or song data. You can specify whether the Vocoder

effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song

data (page 172).

CHORDAL The harmony notes are determined by the following three types

of chord: chords played in the chord section of the keyboard

(with the [ACMP] turned on), chords played in the LEFT Voice

section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned off and the

[LEFT] turned on), and chords contained in song data for control-

ling the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any

chord data.)

OFF Chords are not detected from the song data.

XF Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony.

1–16 Chords are detected from note data in the speciﬁed song chan-

nel.

Normal Normal setting

Low Setting for lower voice. This setting is also appropriate for growl-

ing and shouting.

High Setting for higher voice. This setting is also appropriate for sing-

ing close to the microphone.

Using a Microphone

Talk Setting

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

174

Talk Setting

This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between

songs, separate from the settings for your singing performance.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SET-

TING display.

3 Press the TAB [

] button to select the TALK SETTING tab display.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) (page 175) to

be set.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play.

CAUTION

Settings in the TALK SETTING

tab display are automatically

saved to the instrument when

ou exit from the display.

However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Using a Microphone

Talk Setting

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

175

Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the TALK SETTING Tab Display

VOLUME This determines the output volume of the microphone sound.

PAN This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

REVERB DEPTH This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the micro-

phone sound.

CHORUS DEPTH This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the micro-

phone sound.

TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUA-

TOR

This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the

overall sound (excepting the microphone input)—allowing you

to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the

overall instrument sound.

DSP MIC ON/OFF This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON

or OFF.

DSP MIC TYPE This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the micro-

phone sound.

DSP MIC DEPTH This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone

sound.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

176

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the spe-

cial Clavinova website by directly connecting the instrument to the Internet. This

section contains terms related to computers and online communications. If there

are some terms you are unfamiliar with, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 188).

Connecting the Instrument to the

Internet

You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical ﬁber,

cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For speciﬁc

instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible LAN adaptors, rout-

ers, etc.), refer to the Yamaha website:

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

To use the Internet connection, you will ﬁrst need to subscribe to an Internet ser-

vice or provider.

Connection example 1:

Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)

Connection example 2:

Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)

Connection example 3: Wireless connection

The special website can be

opened when directly connect-

ing the Clavinova to the Internet.

Depending on the Internet con-

nection, you may not be able to

connect to two or more devices

(for example, a computer and

the instrument), depending on

the contract with the provider.

This means you cannot connect

with the Clavinova. If in doubt,

check your contract or contact

your provider.

Connect the LAN cable to the

LAN port.

Due to EU regulations, users

within Europe should use an STP

(shielded twisted pair) cable to

prevent electromagnetic interfer-

ence.

Some types of modems require

an optional hub network for

simultaneously connecting to

several devices (such as com-

puter, musical instrument, etc.).

Connect the LAN cable to the

LAN port.

A USB wireless LAN adaptor

also can be used.

Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connect-

ing the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from

the instrument itself.

Modem*

No router capability

Router

Cable type

LAN cable

LAN port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

LAN cable

ADSL modem

Router capability

LAN cable

LAN port

LAN cable

Modem* Access point

Wireless Game Adaptor

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Accessing the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

177

Accessing the Special Website

From the special website, you can audition and purchase Song data, among other

things. To access the site, press the [INTERNET] button, while the instrument is

connected to the Internet.

To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument,

press the [EXIT] button.

Operations in the Special Website

Scrolling the Display

When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser

display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display. Use

the [DATA ENTRY] dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the

page that are not shown.

Scroll bar

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

178

Following Links

When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To

select the link, press the [6

†

]/[7

π†

]/[8

†

] buttons or use the [DATA ENTRY]

dial. Press the [8

] (ENTER) button to actually call up the link destination.

You can also select and call up links by using the [A]–[J] buttons.

Entering Characters

This section explains how to enter characters within the website, for inputting a

password or searching for data, refer to the “Entering Characters” on page 73.

Return to the Previous Web Page

To return to a previously selected web page, press the [1

π†

] (BACK) button. To

return to the page selected before pressing the [1

π†

] (BACK) button, press the

π†

] (FORWARD) button.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

179

Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of

a Web Page

To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to

try reloading), press the [5

] (REFRESH) button.

To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [6

]

(STOP) button.

SSL:

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is an

industry-standard method for

protecting web communications

by using data encryption and

other tools.

Monitoring the Internet Connection Status

The messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate

the current Internet connection status.

13 4

Message

The following three messages are displayed according to the loading status of

the web page.

“Disconnected”

This appears when the instrument is not connected with the Internet. When

this message is displayed, the web page cannot be seen. Icon 1 is displayed.

“Now opening web page... ”

The web page is being loaded. Icon 2 ﬂashes.

“Web page has been displayed. ”

Loading of the web page is completed, and the page is displayed completely.

Icon 2 stops ﬂashing. When the displayed web page uses SSL, icon 3 is dis-

played, and information is encrypted for communication.

Strength of the reception is displayed in 4 when connecting to the Internet by

wireless LAN. When reception is weak, move the instrument near the access

point to improve reception.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

180

Purchasing and Downloading Data

You can purchase and download Song data (for playback on this instrument) and

other types of data from the special website. For details on purchasing and down-

loading data, refer to the instructions on the site itself.

Operation after purchase and download

When downloading is completed, a message appears asking you whether or not to

open the File Selection display. Select “YES” to call up the File Selection display,

from which you can select the downloaded data. To return to the Internet display,

select “NO” When the File Selection display is open, press the [8

] (UP) button to

call up the next highest level folder.

Download Destination

The download destination depends on the use of storage media, as

described below.

• When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument during pur-

chase:

The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the USB

tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up

the next highest level folder, press the [8

] (UP) button in the File

Selection display.

• When a USB storage device is not connected to the instrument during pur-

chase:

The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the User

tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up

the next highest level folder, press the [8

] (UP) button in the File

Selection display.

Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages

You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page

can be instantly called up in the future.

1 With the desired page currently selected, press the [4

ππ

††

] (BOOK-

MARK) button. The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the

currently registered bookmarks.

The title of the currently selected web page is shown below the list.

2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [3

ππ

††

]

(ADD) button.

CAUTION

The purchased data will be

lost if you turn the power to

the instrument off during

download.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

181

3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button.

4 To register the bookmark, press the [7

ππ

††

] (EXECUTE) button, or

press the [8

ππ

††

] (CANCEL) button to cancel.

5 To return to the browser, press the [8

ππ

††

] (CLOSE) button.

Opening a Bookmarked Page

1 Press the [4

ππ

††

] (BOOKMARK) button to call up the Bookmark dis-

play.

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select the desired bookmark.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

] (VIEW) button to open the page of the selected

bookmark.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

182

Editing Bookmarks

From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the

order of your bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from

the list.

123456 7

ππ

††

Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list.

2 View

Opens the web page of the selected bookmark.

3 Add

Used when registering a bookmark (page 180).

4 Move

Changes the order of the bookmarks.

1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [4

ππ

††

]

(MOVE) button.

The lower part of the display changes, letting you select the new posi-

tion for the bookmark.

2 Select the intended position by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

)

button.

3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the

ππ

††

] (EXECUTE) button.

5 Changing names

Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing the [5

π†

] (CHANGE) but-

ton calls up the display for entering characters. For details on entering characters,

see page 73.

6 Delete

Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list.

7 Close

Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

183

About the Internet Settings Display

From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the

Internet connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet

Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others.

Basic Operation

1 Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting dis-

play.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired display.

3 Select the desired item by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button.

4 To call up the relevant Edit display, press the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (EDIT)

button.

For some items, the Edit display may not be shown, but the setting or change

may be executed.

5 Press the [2

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select the setting or change the

value.

This can also be done by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Entering Characters

When the character input dis-

play is opened, you can enter

characters. (Refer to “Entering

Characters” on page 178.)

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

184

6 To execute the setting, press the [3

ππ

] (ENTER) button. To cancel,

press the [3

††

] (CANCEL) button.

7 To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display,

press the [7

ππ

††

] (SAVE) button.

To cancel, press the [8

π†

] (CANCEL) button.

Browser

LAN

Both the wired LAN and wireless LAN need to be set in this display.

1 Encode

Selects the character code encoding for the browser.

2 Home Page

Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page.

3 Set current page as Home

For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 186.

4 Restore Default Home

Restores the home page setting.

5 Show images

Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set

to on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off.

6 Time zone

This determines the time zone setting for the browser.

Make a written note of the settings here, in

case you have to enter them again.

Use DHCP

DNS server1

DNS server2

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway

1 Use DHCP

Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP,

select “ON.”

2 DNS server 1/DNS server 2

These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These

settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manu-

ally)” or “OFF.”

3 IP address/Subnet mask/Gateway

These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP

address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made

when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.”

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

185

Wireless LAN

These settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor.

For a wireless LAN setup, make sure to set both the LAN settings (page 184) and

the Wireless LAN settings below.

Others

The settings at left are not neces-

sary when using the Wireless

Game Adaptor.

Make a written note of the settings here, in

case you have to enter them again

SSID

Channel

Encryption

WEP key type

WEP key length

WEP key

Wireless Networks

Determines whether or not Wireless Networks are displayed.

SSID

Determines the SSID setting.

3 Channel

Determines the channel.

4 Encryption

Determines whether or not the data is encrypted.

5 WEP key type/WEP key length/WEP key

These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the

type and length of the encryption key.

1 Proxy server/Proxy port/Non-proxy server

Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for the non-

proxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server. When

using a non-proxy server, enter a separator (comma) between each server name.

2 Delete cookies

Deletes the information of all saved cookies.

3 Delete all bookmarks

Deletes all saved bookmarks.

4 Initialize setup

Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializ-

ing Internet Settings” on page 187.

5 Connection information

Shows detailed information on the current connection.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

186

Changing the Home Page

In the default condition, the top page of the special website is automatically set to

be the Home page for the browser. However, you can specify any desired page on

the special website to be the Home page.

Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page.

Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting dis-

play.

Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the BROWSER tab.

Press the [1

††

] (

††

) button to select the setting “Set current page as

Home.”

5 Use the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (EDIT) buttons to actually set the selected

page as your new Home page.

6 To return to the browser, press the [7

ππ

††

] (SAVE) button.

To cancel, press the [8

π†

] (CANCEL) button.

45 6

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

187

Initializing Internet Settings

The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize

operation of the instrument; Internet settings must be initialized separately, as

explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of

the browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays

(except for the cookies and bookmarks), including those related to Internet connec-

tion.

1 Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Settings dis-

play.

2 Press the TAB [

] button to select the OTHERS tab.

3 Press the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select “Initialize.”

4 Use the [2

ππ

††

]/ [3

ππ

††

] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet set-

tings.

Sometimes cookies contain per-

sonal information.

3 4

Delete cookies/bookmarks

Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize oper-

ation above.

To delete the cookies or bookmarks, use the appropriate operations in the

OTHERS tab display (page 185).

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Glossary of Internet Terms

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

188

Glossary of Internet Terms

Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical ﬁber) that allows for high-speed, high-

volume data communication.

Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display

that shows the contents of the web pages.

Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Inter-

net. The function is similar to a preference ﬁle in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers”

certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information

each time you visit the site.

DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network conﬁguration information

can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.

DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses.

Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or

other local storage device—much like copying ﬁles from your hard disk drive to a ﬂoppy disk. For this

instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.

Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion

despite differing communications standards.

Home page The ﬁrst page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to

mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.

Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers,

mobile phones and other devices.

IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location

on the network.

LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single

location (such as an ofﬁce or home) by means of a special cable.

Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a

web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link.

Modem

A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It

converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa.

NTP

Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network.

For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL.

Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is

necessary to contract to a provider.

Proxy

A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing informa-

tion on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulﬁll the requests

itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and

speed, and to ﬁlter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network.

Router

A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several

computers in a house or ofﬁce, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually con-

nected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.

Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to ﬁles and services.

Site

Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collec-

tion of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site.

SSID This is an identiﬁcation name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. Commu-

nication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names.

SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting conﬁdential data such as credit card numbers

over the Internet.

Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks.

URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to speciﬁc websites and

pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”

Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.

Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.

Wireless Game

Adaptor

(Wireless Ethernet

Converter or Bridge)

Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game

machines, etc. equipped with LAN ports.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

189

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

Using Headphones

(

1 [PHONES] jacks)

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]

jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the leftward

underside of the instrument. For details, see page 17.

Connecting a Microphone or

Guitar (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack)

By connecting a microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack

(standard 1/4" phone jack) located on the left underside

of the instrument, you can enjoy singing along with

Song playback (KARAOKE) or with your own perfor-

mance. The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar

sounds through the built-in speakers. For instructions on

connecting, see page 54. Please note that when con-

necting devices of high output level, make sure to set

the [MIC. LINE] switch to “LINE.”

Connecting Audio & Video

Devices (345)

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance.

Using External Audio Devices for play-

back and Recording (3 [AUX OUT]

Jacks, [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks)

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to

amplify the instrument’s sound or to a cassette tape

recorder or a digital audio device for recording your

performance. The microphone or guitar sound con-

nected to the instrument’s [MIC./LINE IN] jack) is output

at the same time. Refer to the diagrams below and use

audio cables for connection. These jacks are located on

the underside jacks panel of the instrument.

[AUX OUT] Jacks

(Standard phone jacks of [L/L+R] and [R])

When these are connected, you can use the instru-

ment’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the vol-

ume of the sound output to the external device.

Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks

and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using

appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for

connection with a monaural device.

CAUTION

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic

components, turn off the power of all the components.

Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure

to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, elec-

trical shock or damage to the components may occur.

MIN MA X

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

345

6 8 9

)

P. 191 P. 194 P. 194 P. 195

P. 190 P. 190 P. 196P. 189

The front side

of the instru-

ment (the key-

board side)

The right side of the instrument

(near the higher keys)

The left side of the instrument

(near the lower keys)

CAUTION

When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, ﬁrst turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

Do not route the output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)] jacks to the [AUX IN] jacks. If you make

this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jacks is

output from the [AUX OUT] [AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)]

jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop

that will make normal performance impossible, and may

even damage both pieces of equipment.

Instrument

Powered speakers

Input jack

Phone plug

(standard)

Phone plug (standard)

Audio cable

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

190

[AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED)] Jacks

(RCA pin jacks of [L]and [R])

When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL

FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a

ﬁxed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] con-

trol setting. Use these when controlling volume with an

external audio system, or recording the instrument’s

sound to an external audio system. Connect the instru-

ment’s AUX OUT [L]/[R] (LEVEL FIXED) jacks and the

AUX IN jacks of an external audio system using appro-

priate audio cables.

Playing External Audio Devices with the

Built-in Speakers (4 [AUX IN] Jacks)

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be con-

nected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external

instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speak-

ers. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc.) of an

external synthesizer or the tone generator module and

the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appro-

priate audio cables.

•Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device.

•The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input

signal from the [AUX IN] jacks.

Showing the Instrument’s Display Con-

tents on an External Monitor

(5 [VIDEO OUT] Terminal, [RGB OUT]

Terminal)

Connect the instrument to an external monitor, and you

can have the current display contents, lyrics or text ﬁles

(for group sing-alongs and the like) displayed on the TV,

video, computer. For instructions on connecting, see

page 56.

CAUTION

When the sound of an external device is output to the

instrument, ﬁrst turn on the power to the external device,

then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn

the power off.

Instrument

Stereo system

Audio cable

Pin plug

Instrument

Synthesizer

Tone generator

Phone plug (standard)

Audio cable

Pin plug

Settings

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] (UTILITY) → TAB [

√

][

]

SCREEN OUT

2 Select the video equipment standard

“NTSC”, “PAL”, or “RGB” by using the

ππ

††

]/ [2

ππ

††

] buttons. Select the con-

tents of the Screen Out signal—the current

display contents (LCD) or lyrics (LYRICS)/

text (TEXT) —by using the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

]

buttons.

• Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by

your video equipment.

• Set the RGB to computer monitor.

•When LYRICS/TEXT is selected as the contents of the Screen

Out signal, only the lyrics of the song or text ﬁles are output

via VIDEO OUT/RGB OUT, regardless of the display that is

called up on the instrument.

•Avoid looking at the television, video, or computer monitor

for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage

your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on

distant objects to avoid eyestrain.

Connecting Audio & Video Devices

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

191

Using the Footswitch or Foot

Controller

(6 [AUX PEDAL] jack)

By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the

[AUX PEDAL] jack, you can have convenient control

over various user-assignable functions. For example,

connecting the Foot controller FC7 and assigning it the

volume control function allows you to add expression

to your performance by controlling the volume level of

the notes you play. Or by connecting the FC4 or FC5

footswitch and assigning it to the Style playback start/

stop function, you can start and stop the Style with your

foot. (In this case, the pedal has the same function as

the panel STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.) The

assignable functions are listed following the instructions

below.

Assigning Speciﬁc Functions to Each

Foot Pedal

In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three

piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center

and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various func-

tions here. The following explanations cover the related

operations and assignable functions (parameters).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

]

PEDAL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the

three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal, to

which the function is to be assigned.

3 Use the [1

ππ

††

] button to select the functions to

be assigned to the pedal speciﬁed in step 2.

Details on the pedal functions are listed below.

4 Use the [2

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the

details of the selected functions.

The available parameters differ depending on the

function selected in step 3. Details on the parameters

are given below.

5 Check that the desired function is controllable

with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal.

n When you use a pedal to switch Registration Memory

settings (page 134), these settings are invalid.

CAUTION

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when

the power is off.

Foot Pedals

Footswitch FC4

(optional)

Footswitch FC5

(optional)

Foot Controller FC7

(optional)

Set the polarity of the pedal

Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the partic-

ular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For exam-

ple, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected

function on, while pressing a different make/brand of

pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this set-

ting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (AUX PEDAL

POLARITY) button to switch the polarity.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

192

Details on the pedal functions are listed here. For functions indicated with “

“, use only the foot controller; proper

operation cannot be done with a footswitch.

Assignable Pedal Functions

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is available only

for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack.

SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal,

all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immedi-

ately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO Allows you to use the pedal as a sostenuto pedal. In other words, if you play a note or

chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sus-

tain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This

makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the vol-

ume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain

appropriate Voices.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when

the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal

is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is

played while the preceding note is still held). Portamento Time can also be adjusted

from the Mixing Console (page 90). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices,

which would not sound appropriately with this function.

PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal.

MOD/S.ART1* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various effects can

be added to the S. Articulation Voice (page 78). The effect becomes deeper when press-

ing down the foot controller. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on

this display.

MOD/S.ART2 (ALT) As a variation on MOD/S.ART1, the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by the

pedal/footswitch. The effects (waveform) is alternately turned on and off each time the

pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on

this display.

S.ART SW When you use a S. Articulation voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/foot-

switch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this

function on/off for each keyboard part on this display.

DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off.

VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is

selected.

HARMONY/ECHO Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off.

VOCAL HARMONY Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off.

TALK Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off.

SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page.

SCORE PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page.

LYRICS PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next lyrics page.

LYRICS PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can return to the last lyrics page.

TEXT PAGE+ You can turn to the next text page.

TEXT PAGE– You can return to the last text page.

SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

193

n The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals.

Adjustable Parameters for Each Function

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2

π†

]–[8

π†

], and their availability depends on the selected control

type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2”

and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

INTRO1–3 Same as the [INTRO I–III] buttons.

MAIN A–D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A–D] buttons.

FILL DOWN Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate left.

FILL SELF Plays a ﬁll-in.

FILL BREAK Plays a break.

FILL UP Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate right.

ENDING1–3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I–III] buttons.

FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In /Fade Out function on and off.

FINGERED/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 107).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the

chord is changed during Style playback. If the ﬁngering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,”

the function does not work.

PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons. You

can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.

DUAL ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button.

SPLIT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS– Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT, RIGHT1,

RIGHT2

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft

effect (page 192) starts working.

DEPTH Determines the depth of the pedal effect.

UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change is

raised or lowered.

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch

change, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 90) set-

ting.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here,

letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT

above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the

pedal.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

194

Connecting External MIDI

Devices (7 [MIDI] Terminals)

Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI

cables to connect external MIDI devices.

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effec-

tively use it, refer to the following sections:

•What is MIDI?..............................................page 196

•What You Can Do With MIDI.......................page 199

• MIDI Settings ...............................................page 200

Connecting a Computer, USB

Device, or Internet (789))

Connecting a Computer

(7 [MIDI] and 8 [USB TO HOST] Terminals)

By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or

[MIDI] terminals, you can transfer data between the

instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advan-

tage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in

mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB-

MIDI driver.

The instructions below explain how to connect and use

the terminals.

If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recom-

mend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB,

rather than by MIDI.

Driver

A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between

the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware

device. You need to install a USB-MIDI driver to connect the com-

puter and the instrument. Refer to the separate Installation Guide

(page 4).

This explanation is divided into two parts, covering the

two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST]

terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal.

• Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the instrument to the computer via

USB, use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo)

to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the

instrument to the USB terminal of the computer. Then,

install the USB-MIDI driver.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Expla-

nations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next section.

•The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

•When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connection directly without passing

through a USB hub.

•For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to

the owner’s manual of the relevant software.

• Connection by [MIDI] terminals

There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI

to a computer. If you have a MIDI interface built into

your computer, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the

computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the

instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of

the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface.

MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external

MIDI device.

MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the

instrument.

MIDI THRU Simply relays the MIDI messages received at

MIDI IN.

Instrument

USB cable

CAUTION

Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] termi-

nal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so

risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the

instrument off and restart the computer.

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] ter-

minal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer

(such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open appli-

cation software, also turns off the power to the instrument.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instru-

ment off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/

computer.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

-Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the

instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on

the keyboard or playing back a song.)

•While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you

should wait for six seconds or more between these

operations: When turning the power of the instrument

off then on again, or when alternately connecting/dis-

connecting the USB cable.

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

Computer with MIDI

interface installed

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

[MIDI IN]

terminal

Connecting external MIDI devices ([MIDI] terminals)/Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

195

The second connection possibility involves a separate,

external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a

USB port or a serial port (modem or printer terminal).

Using standard MIDI cables, connect the MIDI OUT ter-

minal of the external interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal

of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal

of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface.

Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer.

Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor

and USB Storage Device

(9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal)

There are two ways of using the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal.

■ By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor, you can

directly access special Internet websites for down-

loading music data (page 176).

■ By connecting the instrument to a USB storage

device with a standard USB cable, you can save data

you’ve created to the connected device, as well as

read data from the connected device.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction.

Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the

previous section.

Using USB Storage Devices

This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB

storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve cre-

ated to the connected device, as well as read data from

the connected device. The following description gener-

ally explains about how to connect and use them.

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read

“Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Mem-

ory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 22.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable.

2 After that, exit once from the selection display

then return to the display (or press the Tab

switch buttons [

√

] and [

] simultaneously from

the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB

2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you

to save ﬁles and play back music data from the

devices.

Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device

You can check this in the display called up by the following oper-

ation:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and

press [F] (PROPERTY).

Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal, you cannot access the USB storage device from the com-

puter via the instrument.

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

MIDI interface

Computer

USB port or serial

port (modem or

printer terminal)

Formatting USB storage media

For details, see page 68.

CAUTION

Formatting a USB storage media completely erases all

data on the media. Make sure that the USB storage media

you’re formatting does not contain important data!

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can

copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then

archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply recon-

nect the device as shown below.

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and

connect it to the computer

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders

Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

196

Connect to the Internet () [LAN] Port)

There are three ways to use the [LAN] port (located on

the bottom left of the instrument) to access special Inter-

net websites, and download song data, etc.

See page 176 for instructions on connecting.

What is MIDI?

Put simply, MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows

easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digi-

tal music instruments and other devices. To get a better

idea of what MIDI does, let’s ﬁrst consider acoustic

instruments, such as a grand piano and a classical gui-

tar. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer

inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the gui-

tar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampling note (previously recorded

note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic

circuit) is played based on information received from

the keyboard.

Now, let’s examine what happens when we playback a

recording. When you play back a music CD (for exam-

ple, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual

sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument. This

is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not neces-

sary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of

the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a

USB storage device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be

transferred to the instrument by ﬁrst copying them to the

storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the

instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also

Standard MIDI ﬁles and Style File-formatted Style ﬁles cre-

ated on other devices can be copied to a USB storage

device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve

copied the data, connect the device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the

data on the instrument.

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the USB

storage device

Computer

USB storage device

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

Disconnect the USB storage

device from the computer an

connect it to the instrument

Internal amp

Playing the key board

Internal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note pro-

duction

Pluck a string and the

body resonates the

sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a sampling

note stored in the tone generator

is played through the speakers.

Recording Playback

Recording and playing back the performance of an

acoustic instrument (audio data)

Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

197

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument.

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic exam-

ple. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is

captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. How-

ever, since the instrument features a built-in sequencer

that lets you record performance data, this recording

equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instru-

ment—the Clavinova—allows you to both record and

play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the instrument ﬁlls this function. The

recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,

playing back the song data, using a tone generator

capable of accurately producing various instrument

sounds—including that of a piano. Looked at in another

way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone genera-

tor is similar to that of the pianist and the piano—one

plays the other. Since digital instruments handle play-

back data and the actual sounds independently, we can

hear our piano performance played by another instru-

ment, such as guitar or violin.

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the instrument can

be thought of as containing several electronic components: a con-

troller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter

note using the grand piano sound on the instrument’s

keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a

resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”

“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it

pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece

of information is changed into a number value and sent

to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis

for sound generation, the tone generator plays the

stored sampled note.

Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the instrument, such as playing the

keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and

stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment Styles

and Songs also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by send-

ing and receiving compatible Note, Control Change,

Program Change and various other types of MIDI data,

or messages.

The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit-

ting note related data and various types of controller

data. The instrument can be controlled by incoming

MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone

generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and

effects, change parameter values and of course play the

voices speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

•The amount of data is much less.

•The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point

of changing voices and transforming the data.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Chan-

nel messages and System messages.

Channel Messages

The instrument is an electronic instrument that can han-

dle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels for

MIDI data reception when using the [USB] terminal).

This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments

at the same time.” Channel messages transmit informa-

tion such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each

of the 16 channels.

Sequencer

Tone Generator

Recording and play back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

USB storage

device

USB storage

device

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance (MIDI data)

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity

(strength at which it was played)

120 (strong)

Connecting a Computer or USB Device/What is MIDI

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

198

What is MIDI?

The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI

data.

MIDI Channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the perfor-

mance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be

simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select

the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The trans-

mitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI

channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI

cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instru-

ment’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches

the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will

sound according to the data sent by the transmitting

instrument.

The instrument’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also

connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 202)

For example, several parts or channels can be transmit-

ted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown

below).

Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompa-

niment (Style playback) sound of the instrument to an exter-

nal sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is

to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting

MIDI data (page 202).

The instrument also allows you to determine how the

received data is played back (page 203).

System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. These include System Exclusive messages for

transferring data unique to each instrument manufac-

turer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI

device.

The messages transmitted/received by the instrument

are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart in the separate Data List.

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when

the keyboard is played. Each mes-

sage includes a speciﬁc note num-

ber which corresponds to the key

which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is

played.

Program Change For selecting Voices (with control

change bank select MSB/LSB set-

tings)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console),

etc.

NEWS

Weather report

NEWS

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting,

Start/stop operation

MIDI cable

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Tra ck 1

Tra ck 2

Tra ck 3

Tra ck 4

Tra ck 5

Tra ck 6

Tra ck 7

Tra ck 8

Tra ck 9

Tra ck 10

Tra ck 11

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 2

LEFT

STYLE instrument

Clavinova track (channnel)

External sequencer

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

199

What You Can Do With MIDI

■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using

the instrument’s auto accompaniment features on an

external sequencer (or computer with sequencer

software). After recording, edit the data with the

sequencer, then play it back on the instrument.

When you want to use the instrument as an XG-com-

patible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part

for MIDI channels 1–16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in

MIDI Receive (page 203).

■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard

MIDI Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compati-

bility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback

the data recorded by CVP-409/407, and whether or not

the CVP-409/407 can playback commercially available

song data or song data created for other instruments or

on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data

characteristics, you may be able to play back the data

without any problem, or you may have to perform some

special operations before the data can be played back.

If you run into problems playing back data, please refer

to the information below.

Sequence Formats

Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different

systems, referred to as “sequence formats.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The

CVP-409/407 is compatible with the following formats.

● SMF (Standard MIDI ﬁle)

This is the most common sequence format. Standard

MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types:

Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compati-

ble with Format 0, and most commercially available

software is recorded as Format 0.

•The CVP-409/407 is compatible with both Format 0

and Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the CVP-409/407 is automati-

cally saved as SMF Format 0.

● ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments. This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

•The CVP-409/407 is compatible with ESEQ.

● XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard

MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-

ended expandability for the future. The instrument is

capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing

lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format

used for MIDI sequence ﬁles. The instrument is compat-

ible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data

using SMF Format 0.)

● Style File

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment know-how into a single uniﬁed format.

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, Voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback. The instru-

ment is compatible with the following formats.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording meth-

ods.

● GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation for-

mats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

● GM System Level 2

“GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that

enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and

improves Song data compatibility. It provides for

increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded

voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

● XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over Voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the CVP-409/407 using Voices

in the XG category is XG-compatible.

● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments.

● GS

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation.

In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhance-

ment of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and

Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over Voices and effects.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Instrument

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit Computer or

Sequencer

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Instrument

MIDI receive

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

200

MIDI Settings

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for

the instrument. The instrument gives you a set of ten

pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and

easily reconﬁgure the instrument to match your particu-

lar MIDI application or external device. Also, you can

edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten

of your original templates to the USER display. You can

then save all these original templates as a single ﬁle to

USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection dis-

play (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY

→ TAB [

] SYSTEM RESET).

Basic Operation

1 Call up the operation (MIDI template selection)

display.

Function

→ [I] MIDI

2 To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit

them

Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET dis-

play. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI

template.

To use the templates already saved to the USER

display or to edit them

Press the TAB [

] button to select the USER display.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI tem-

plate.

3 To edit a template, press the [8

††

] (EDIT) but-

ton to call up the MIDI display for editing.

The individual parameters settings are shown for the

selected template. Here you can edit each parame-

ter.

4 Use the TAB [

√

]/[

] buttons to call up the rele-

vant setting display.

5 When you’ve ﬁnished editing, press the [EXIT]

button to return to the MIDI template selection

display (PRESET or USER).

6 Select the USER tab display to save the data by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons (page 69).

SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings (page 202)

TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings

(page 202)

RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings (page 203)

BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord

for Style playback via MIDI recep-

tion data (page 203)

CHORD DETECT

display

Settings for the chord type for Style

playback via MIDI reception data

(

page 204)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

201

MIDI Settings

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates

Template name Description

All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2,and LEFT), with the excep-

tion of Song parts.

KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are man-

aged. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the

left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.”

Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling

one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/

sequencer).

Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play

Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external

sequencer.

Clock Ext Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instru-

ment’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on

the MIDI device connected to the instrument.

MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators

from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play

melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left-

hand buttons.

MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass

notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI

note events.

MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially

convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the

chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

202

MIDI Settings

MIDI System Settings

The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to

be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 200.

■ LOCAL CONTROL

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When

Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instru-

ment controls its own (local) internal tone generator,

allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and

controllers are internally disconnected from the instru-

ment’s tone generator section so that no sound is output

when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For

example, this allows you to use an external MIDI

sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices, and

use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the exter-

nal sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

■ Clock setting, etc.

● CLOCK

Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its

own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from

an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting

when the instrument is being used alone or as a master

keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the

instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer,

or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to

that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting:

MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the

external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instru-

ment’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmit-

ting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by

an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is

indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display.

● TRANSMIT CLOCK

Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set

to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted

even if a Song or Style is played back.

● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE

Determines whether or not the instrument's transpose

setting (page 58) is applied to the note events received

by the instrument via MIDI.

● START/STOP

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop)

messages affect Song or Style playback.

■ MESSAGE SW

● SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Sys-

tem Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns

MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclu-

sive messages generated by external equipment on or

off.

● CHORD SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord

exclusive data (chord detect. root and type) on or off.

The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition

of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment on or off.

MIDI Transmit Settings

The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display

to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 200. This determines which parts will be sent as

MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will

be sent.

Operation

Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via

which the selected part will be transmitted. You can also

determine the types of data to be sent.

● With the exception of the two parts below, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• UPPER

The keyboard part played on the right side of the key-

board from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/

or 2).

• LOWER

The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard

from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by

the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

● Tx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is transmitted on the chan-

nel(s).

SYSTEM display

TRANSMIT display

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

203

MIDI Settings

When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel

If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts,

the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel—

resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the con-

nected MIDI device.

About the protected Songs

Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper

Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted.

■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or

received (recognized)

The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS-

MIT/RECEIVE display.

• Note (Note events).......................................page 164

• CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ..........................page 164

• PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...........................page 164

• PB (Pitch Bend)............................................page 164

•AT (Aftertouch).............................................page 164

MIDI Receive Settings

The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be

called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 200.

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and

over which MIDI channels the data will be received.

Operation

Select the channel to be received and the part via which

the selected channel will be received. You can also

determine the types of data to be received.

● The instrument can receive MIDI messages over

32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB con-

nection.

● With the exception of the two parts below, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• KEYBOARD

The received note messages control the instrument’s

keyboard performance.

• EXTRA PART 1–5

There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving

and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not

used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be

used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by

using these ﬁve parts in addition to the general parts

(except for the microphone sound).

● Rx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is received on the channel(s).

n Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split

point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel

controls (page 132).

■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB ter-

minal and MIDI terminals

The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the

[USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/

receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the

MIDI messages is as follows:

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback

via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be

called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 200.

These settings let you determine the bass note for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the

chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected

regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point set-

tings. When several channels are simultaneously set to

“ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data

received over the channels.

Operation

Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that chan-

nel. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF.

RECEIVE display

MIDI/USB1

01–16

USB2

01–16

USB2USB1

MIDI/USB 01–16

[MIDI IN] jack

MIDI reception MIDI transmission

[USB TO

HOST] jack

[MIDI OUT] jack

[USB TO

HOST] jack

Port

handling

Merge

BASS display

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

204

MIDI Settings

Setting the Chord Type for Style Play-

back via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT

display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Opera-

tion” on page 200.

These settings let you determine the chord type for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for

detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be

detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The chord type

will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or

split point settings. When several channels are simulta-

neously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from

merged MIDI data received over the channels.

The operation procedure is basically the same as that of

the BASS display above.

CHORD DETECT display

Displaying the Voice Program Change Number

Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number

are shown in the Voice selection display. This is useful

when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB val-

ues and program change number you need to specify

when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.

You can set this in the display called up by the following

operations: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [

√

][

]

CONFIG 2. Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu

ON and OFF.

•The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the

actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since

that number system starts from “0.”

• For the GS Voices, this feature is not available (the program

change numbers are not shown).

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

205

Appendix

Troubleshooting

The instrument does not turn on.

• Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the

instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet.

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on

or off.

• Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This

is normal.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers.

• Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the

instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile

phone, or use it further away from the instrument.

The letters in the display cannot be read, because the

display is too bright (or dark).

• Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum

visibility.

• Adjust the brightness of the display (page 19).

The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard.

•The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an

appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

•The volume of the individual parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 109).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker out-

put. (This happens when the speaker setting is set to

“HEADPHONE SW”; page 17.) Unplug the headphones.

• Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 17).

•The Fade-In and Fade-Out function is on, muting the

sound. To turn it off, press the pedal to which you

assigned the Fade In/Out function.

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON

(page 202).

Not all simultaneously played notes sound.

•You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony

(page 217) of the instrument. When the maximum

polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will

stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style

playback volume.

•The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40).

Keys do not sound at the proper pitch.

• Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on

the operation display (page 43).

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

The Scale parameter has probably been set to some-

thing other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of

the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the

Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 84).

- There is a slight difference in sound quality among

different notes played on the keyboard.

- Some Voices have a looping sound.

- Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

•This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sam-

pling system.

Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played

in the upper or lower registers.

•This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which,

when reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

The Main display does not appear even when turning

the power on.

•This may occur if a USB storage device has been

installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB stor-

age device may result a long interval between turning

the power on and appearance of the Main display. To

avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the

device.

The main background image from the CD-ROM is not

displayed.

•This is because the Main display is loaded prior to load-

ing of the image from the CD-ROM. To remedy this,

copy the image data from the CD-ROM to the User dis-

play, then set it as the main background image (page 19).

The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not

work for the relevant pedals.

•The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the

pedal cord plug into the proper jack (page 211, 214).

• Each pedal has been assigned to a different function.

Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUS-

TAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 191).

• Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to

OFF (page 135).

Some characters of the ﬁle/folder name are garbled.

•The language settings have been changed. Set the appro-

priate language for the ﬁle/folder name (page 18).

An existing ﬁle is not shown.

•The ﬁle extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed

or deleted. Manually rename the ﬁle, adding the appro-

priate extension, on a computer.

The data contained in the USB storage device is not

shown on the instrument itself.

• Data ﬁles with names of more than 50 characters cannot

be handled by the instrument. Rename the ﬁle, reducing

the number of characters to 50 or less.

Overall

Pedals

Files/Folders

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

206

Appendix

How can I stop the demo?

• Press the [EXIT] button.

The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display

does not sound.

• Check whether or not the selected part is turned on

(page 79).

•To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, make

sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)]

buttons are off. For the Voice to be layered in the right-

hand range, press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]

button. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range,

press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button.

A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The

sound is slightly different each time the keys are played.

•The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and

both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the

RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts.

The sound seems strange or different than expected

when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the

Style or Song from the Mixer.

• When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parame-

ter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are

reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore

the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you

can restore the original sound by returning to the begin-

ning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the

case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by

selecting the same Style again.

Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute

Voice.

•This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony/

Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices.

The Harmony function does not operate.

• Harmony cannot be used with the AI Fingered or AI Full

Keyboard ﬁngering modes. Select an appropriate ﬁnger-

ing mode (page 107).

When a Voice is changed, the previously selected

effect is changed.

• Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are

automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice

Set parameters are turned on (page 106).

The Voice produces excessive noise.

• Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the

Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FIL-

TER page of the Mixing Console display (page 90).

The sound is distorted or noisy.

•The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all

relevant volume settings are appropriate.

•This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all

unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects

(page 92).

• Adjust the sound using the [8

π†

] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.)

buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and

Saving the selected EQ” (page 95) , if you are using the

Master EQ.

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display

(page 101) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these

settings if necessary.

• Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the

Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Har-

monic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display

(page 90).

The sound does not change when replacing Voices

with the Song Auto Revoice feature.

• Depending on the particular Song data, there are some

instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even

when replacing Voices.

The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when

editing the Voice.

•Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters

may not make much change in the actual sound depend-

ing on the original settings of the Voice.

Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot

be selected for Step recording.

•This is normal.

Style playback does not start.

• Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 202).

Only the rhythm channel plays.

• Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned

on; press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

•You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the

keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of

the keyboard.

Styles cannot be selected.

• If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or

greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be ready by the instrument.

The desired chord is not recognized or output by the

auto accompaniment.

•You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating

the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fin-

gered Mode” of the separate Data List.

•You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁn-

gering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check

the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according

to the selected mode (page 108).

Synchro Stop cannot be turned on.

• Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or

when Style On/Off is set to off. Make sure the ﬁngering

mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al

Full Keyboard” and set Style On/Off to on.

Demo

Voice

Style

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

207

Appendix

Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard-

less of the split point or where chords are played on

the keyboard.

•This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Key-

board” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is

selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of

the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If

desired, select a different ﬁngering mode (page 108).

When playing back one Style and selecting another,

the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper

Tempo.

•You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be

called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO

parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function.

Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style

playback.

This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways

shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta-

neously.

• Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the

Style.

• Start the Style playback after playing back a Song.

The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong

or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a

Style or a Voice after selecting a Song.

•The level balance of the Parts can change and unex-

pected sounds can be produced because of the effects

applied to each Part.

The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type

parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature.

•The selected section is set to record enable. Release the

recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1

†

]–

†

] button in the recording channel display (TAB [

√

]

button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH).

The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel

Edit.

•This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles

cannot be edited.

The Song/Style registered to the Registration Mem-

ory cannot be called up.

• If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage

device and the USB storage device is not inserted or

connected to the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be

called up. Insert or connect the appropriate USB storage

device containing the Song/Style data.

The order for calling up Registration Memory settings

is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting

display.

•The bank containing the Registration has not been

selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 132).

When using the Freeze function of the Registration

Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not

change even when changing the Registration Mem-

ory setting.

•The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style

group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the

Freeze setting display (page 133).

Even though a Registration Memory setting contain-

ing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection dis-

play shows a Preset Voice.

•This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the

actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice.

When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive,

the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the

source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings

as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registra-

tion Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the

instrument selects the Preset voice (on which the User/

USB Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter

settings to it—so that your original User/USB Voice is

sounded.

Songs cannot be selected.

•This may be because the language settings have been

changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song ﬁle

name.

• If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or

greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be read by the instrument.

Song playback does not start.

• “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make

sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection

display (page 35).

• Make sure to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

•The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data.

Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the

SONG [STOP] button.

• In the case a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle may not be in the same

folder. It cannot be played back unless the original ﬁle

(showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song

name) is in the same folder.

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle name may have been

changed. Rename the ﬁle with the original ﬁle name (so

that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name).

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the ﬁle icon may have been changed. Songs

to which write-protect has been applied cannot be

played back when the ﬁle icon of the original has been

changed.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 202).

Registration memory

Song

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

208

Appendix

Song playback stops before the Song is ﬁnished.

•The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback

is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the

[GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function.

The Song last selected before turning off the power is

no longer available.

• If the Song last selected before turning off the power is

contained in USB storage device, you’ll need to reinsert/

reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the

Song again.

The measure number is different from that of the

score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing

the [REW]/[FF] buttons.

•This happens when playing back music data for which a

speciﬁc, ﬁxed tempo is set.

In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set.

•The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after

setting the A point.

When playing back a Song, some channels do not

play.

• Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn

playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF”

(page 143).

A Song to which write-protect has been applied

(“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name) cannot be moved to external media such as a

SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk.

•A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot

be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/

ﬂoppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to

move the song to a USB ﬂash memory device connected

to this instrument.

The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite

match that of other instruments’ Voices.

•The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices

may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used

with other instrument Voices. Set the Tuning Curve to

“FLAT” (page 100).

The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track

1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice.

•A part other than the melody part has been assigned to

Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to

Track 1 (page 142).

The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback,

even after pressing the [GUIDE] button.

• Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps (page 141).

•Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indi-

cated by the Guide lamps.

The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower/higher

than the actual pitch.

•The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two

lower/higher than the actual pitch depending on the

selected Voice.

The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light.

•The Guide function for chords (page 50) has been

enabled. Turn the Style off by pressing the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button.

The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords.

• Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to “FollowLights”

(page 50).

•You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide

lamps if the chord ﬁngering method is set to “Single Fin-

ger,” “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” Select

another ﬁngering method (page 108).

When displaying the music score, long notes that

have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are

not displayed correctly.

• Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be

shown in the music score display exactly as they were

entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button

before inputting each note in the Step Record display

(page 149) may solve the problem.

The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not

displayed correctly.

• Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded

with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data,

the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be

displayed correctly.

The note name partially obscures the note in the dis-

play.

• When several notes occur close to each other, the note

name may obscure the note at left.

The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is

not displayed.

•The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the

right-hand and left-hand parts. Set RIGHT and LEFT to

the appropriate channels (page 39).

The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle

of a measure starting on the next line.

• When all the notes of a measure cannot ﬁt on one line,

the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to

the next line.

Dotted notes are indicated as rests.

•This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as

rests.

Chords are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

Guide

Score

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

209

Appendix

Lyrics are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

Some of the lyrics overlap each other.

•This happens for Songs containing many lyrics.

The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed.

• When the background color is speciﬁed in the song

data, the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed.

Performance assistant technology does not work

appropriately.

• Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop Song playback,

then set the [ACMP ON/OFF] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT]

to off. Finally, restart the Song.

The instrument display contents cannot be sent via

video out/RGB out and do not show on an external

monitor.

• Make sure that the NTSC/PAL/RGB setting corresponds

to the standard of your particular equipment (page 56).

Some ﬂashing parallel lines appear in the TV, video,

or computer monitor.

• Occasionally some ﬂashing parallel lines may appear in

the television, video, or computer. This does not neces-

sarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. For

optimum results, try adjusting the color settings on the

monitor itself.

The monitor you are using may not show the instru-

ment's display contents as expected.

•Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as rec-

ommended, the monitor you are using may not show the

instrument's display contents as expected (e.g., the dis-

play contents may not ﬁt on the screen, the characters

may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incor-

rect).

The microphone input signal cannot be recorded.

•The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by

Song/Style recording. Use the USB Audio Recorder func-

tion (page 60). Furthermore, you can connect a recorder

to the output terminals [AUX OUT, AUX OUT (LEVEL

FIXED) and record the microphone signal.

Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone

sound.

•Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off

(page 57).

The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of-

tune.

Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous

sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In

particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal

Harmony. To remedy this:

• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.

• Use a directional microphone.

•Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song

volume control (page 40).

• Separate the microphone from the external speakers as

much as possible.

• Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the

MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 171).

• Raise the microphone input level (TH) via the Com-

pressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play (page 172).

Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the

Vocal Harmony feature.

• Make sure you are using the appropriate method to

specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Har-

mony mode (page 173).

The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and

then the recording was aborted.

• Make sure to use a compatible USB ﬂash memory

(page 22).

• Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory has enough mem-

ory (page 195).

• If you are using a USB ﬂash memory to which data has

already been recorded, check ﬁrst that no important data

remains on the device, then format it (page 68) and try

recording again.

Lyrics (Karaoke)

Performance assistant technology

Video out/RGB out

Microphone/Vocal harmony

USB Audio Recorder

Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

210

CVP-409 grand piano type: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all

parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below.

Use of incorrect screws can damage the stand.

• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assem-

bly of each unit.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given

below.

The CVP-409 grand piano type features an iAFC (Instru-

mental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound

from the speaker located on the bottom face of the

Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spacious-

ness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer

stay (page 16).

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the

following:

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on

the power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after

each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 176)

• Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face

of the Clavinova.

1 Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all

parts shown in the illustration are included.

How to position the main unit

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the ﬂoor.

Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed

and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit

against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip.

Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instru-

ment and the wall from scratches.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

TIP

Lean the unit against the

wall as shown at right.

Legs Pedal box 6 × 40 mm ﬁxing

screws × 12

AC power cord Cord holder 6 × 20 mm ﬁxing

screws × 4

Main unit

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

CAUTION

Do not place the main unit with

the rear side facing down.

CAUTION

Do not lay the main unit upside

down on the ﬂoor.

CAUTION

Do not position the main unit so

that its bottom is in contact

with ﬂoor.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

Incorrect

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

211

Appendix

2 Attach two front legs and a rear leg.

Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation

of the legs.

Install and tighten four 6 x 40 mm screws on each

leg, starting with one of the front legs.

3 Install the pedal box.

1 Remove the twist tie that afﬁxes the pedal cord to

the upper portion of the pedal box.

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and

attach the pedal box using four 6 x 20 mm

screws.

3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal

connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces

front (toward the keyboard).

If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it.

Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try

again.

4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the

illustration below, then use the cord holder to

afﬁx the pedal cord.

4 Raising the unit to the standing position.

Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

Rear leg

Front leg Front leg

Twist tie

CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

•When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

212

Appendix

5 Connect the power cord.

Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC INLET].

6 Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

After completing the assembly, please check the follow-

ing.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the set-

ting of the voltage selector which is provided in

some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V

or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to

rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for

your region appears next to the pointer on the panel.

The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is

initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect

the AC power cord to the [AC INLET] and an AC wall

outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some

areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall

outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

240

127

110

220

For models that feature

a voltage selector:

Set the voltage selector to an

appropriate voltage.

Right leg on the bottom of the main unit, when

viewed from front

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other

movable ﬁxtures?

→ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise

when you shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way

when you step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against

the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted

securely into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise

unsteady when you play on the keyboard,

refer to the assembly diagrams and

retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper han-

dling can result in damage to the instrument or personal

injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Do not hold here.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

213

Appendix

CVP-409/407: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all

parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below.

Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up

all screws upon com-

pleting assembly of

each unit.

•To disassemble,

reverse the assembly

sequence given below.

1 Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all

parts shown in the illustration are provided.

2 With the key cover closed and the keyboard side

on the bottom, lean the unit against the wall.

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the ﬂoor.

Place the unit on the cloth with the keyboard side on

the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the

unit will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the

wall to protect the instrument and wall from scratches.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

• The top part of the music rest is not ﬁxed. When you lean

the unit against the wall, support the music rest with your

hand so that the music rest will not fall.

CAUTION

• Do not place the main unit

with the rear side facing

down.

• Do not lay the main unit

upside-down on the ﬂoor.

3 Attach the front legs.

4 Attach the rear leg.

5 Raising the unit to the standing position.

Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

•When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screw-

driver ready.

Rear legFront leg (left)

AC power cord

Front leg (right)

Pedal box

5x18 mm ﬁxing

screws × 14

Bundled pedal

cord inside

CAUTION

To prevent the

key cover from

accidentally

opening during

assembly, press

down on the

key cover, mak-

ing sure that

the sheet

(shown) remain

in place.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

CAUTION

Please do not touch the speaker

net. Doing so may damage the

speaker inside.

Incorrect

Front leg (right) Front leg (left)

1 Fix the front right

leg to the bottom

surface of the unit

using two screws.

2 Fix the front right leg

to the speaker box

using two screws.

3 Fix the front left leg in the same way.

If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and

adjust the position of the front leg.

2 Fix the rear legs to the

speaker box using two

screws.

1 Fix the rear legs to

the bottom surface

of the unit using

two screws.

If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and

adjust the position of the rear legs.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

214

Appendix

6 Installing the pedal box.

7 Connect the pedal cord.

8 Set the voltage selector and connect the power

cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the volt-

age selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector

for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screw-

driver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your

region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selec-

tor is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adap-

tor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin conﬁg-

uration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the instrument or result in improper operation.

9 Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it

comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

■ After completing the assembly, please check

the following.

1 Remove the

plastic cover from

the rear legs.

2 Untie and straighten

out the bundled

cord attached to the

bottom of the pedal

box.

3 Pass the pedal

cord between

the pedal box

and the rear leg.

4 Make sure that the pedal box lays ﬂat, with no

gap between itself and the ﬂoor, then afﬁx the

pedal box using two screws.

1 Insert the

pedal cord

plug into the

pedal connec-

tor.

Insert the plug

with the

arrow-printed side facing front

(toward the keyboard side).

If the plug will not go in easily,

do not force it. Double-check

the orientation of the plug,

then try again.

2 Align the pedal cord into

the groove on the rear leg,

and install the plastic cover

onto the groove. Be careful

not to insert the cover’s

attachment strip between

the groove wall and the leg.

Correct

Incorrect

240

127

110

220

(the bottom of the right side

as seen from the front)

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other

movable ﬁxtures?

→ Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

215

Appendix

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Do not hold here.

Hold here.

Do not

hold here.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

216

Appendix

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)

The ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of

the instrument by using the included ﬂoppy disk drive

case and screws. For a list of optional ﬂoppy disk drives

available for this instrument, see “Optional Accesso-

ries” (page 218).

1 Remove the three backing papers from the

adhesive tape in the case, and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk

drive into the case.

2 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown.

3 Attach the drive and case assembly to the left

underside of the instrument, using the included

four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).

4 Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

Insert the drive to the case, with the side

having the rubber stoppers facing the case.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

217

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

CVP-409GP

(grand piano type)

CVP-409 CVP-407

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Keyboard

NW (Natural Wood)

with Synthetic ivory keytops

(Wood is used for the white keys)

NW (Natural Wood)

Keyboard

(Wood is used for the white

keys)

Number of keys 88

Display 640 ✕ 480 dots VGA color 7.8 inch LCD

Music Score, Lyrics, and

Tex t

YES

Wallpaper Customize YES

Voice

Polyphony (max) 128 + 128

Voice Selection

590 voices + 480 XG Voices

19 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS (GS Voices for GS Song playback)

Natural! Voice 38

Articulation!

Voice

Mega Voice 18

Live! Voice 56

Cool! Voice 39

Sweet! Voice 23

Organ Flutes! 10

Regular Voice 368

Sound Creator YES

Effects

Effect

Blocks

Reverb/

Chorus/DSP/

Master

Compressor

Microphone 1

Effect

Types

Reverb/

Chorus/DSP

Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User

Chorus: 30 Preset + 3 User

DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User

DSP 2–6: 191 Preset + 10 User

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User

Master

Compressor

5 Preset + 5 User

Part EQ 27 Parts

Vocal Harmony 60 Preset + 10 User

Accompani

ment Style

Accompaniment Styles 408

Pro Styles 334

Session

Styles

Pianist Styles 36

Mega Voice Styles YES

Fingering

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator YES

OTS

(One Touch Setting)

4 for Each Style

OTS Link YES

Music

Finder

Preset YES

Edit YES

Song

Preset Songs 120

Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Vocal CueTIME

Guide Lamp YES

Performance assistant

technology

YES

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record

Channels

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

218

Appendix

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options

may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

USB Audio Recorder YES

Internet Direct Connection

LAN Port, Wireless Game Adaptor (LAN Port),

External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Memory

Device

USB Flash Memory YES

Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Hard Disk External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Flash Memory (Internal) about 3.2 MB

Memory Card

(SmartMedia, etc.)

External Adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Tempo

Tempo Range 5–500, Tap Tempo

Metronome YES

Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 Languages)

Registration

Memory

Buttons 8

Regist. Sequence/

Freeze

YES

Others

Demo YES

Language for Display 6 Languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Direct Access YES

Piano Reset Button

(incl. Piano Lock)

YES

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Scale Type 9

USB

Connection

USB to HOST

(Computer)

YES

USB TO DEVICE

(left side of front panel)

YES

USB TO DEVICE

(bottom left panel of the

instrument)

YES

Other Connectors

PHONES x 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R, R),

AUX OUT (L/L+R, R), AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L, R),

MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./LINE IN), VIDEO OUT, RGB OUT, LAN

Pedals Functions

VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, S. Articulation,

SONG PLAY/PAUSE, STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

iAFC YES

Ampliﬁers 60 W ✕ 2 + 20 W ✕ 2

Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm + 3 cm (dome)) ✕ 2 + 10 cm ✕ 2

Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]

(CVP-409 grand piano type: Lid up)

(CVP-409 and CVP-407: with the Music

Rest)

1435 mm ✕ 1147 mm ✕ 905 mm

[56-5/8" ✕ 45-1/4" ✕ 35-3/4"]

(1435 mm ✕ 1147 mm ✕ 1555 mm)

[56-5/8" ✕ 45-1/4" ✕ 61-3/8"]

1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 890 mm

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 35-1/8"]

(1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1047 mm)

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-3/8"]

1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 885 mm

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 34-7/8"]

(1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1042 mm)

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-1/8"]

Weight 108 kg (238 lbs., 1-1/2 oz) 86 kg (189 lbs., 9-1/2 oz) 84 kg (185 lbs., 3 oz)

Optional

Accessories

Headphones HPE-160

FootSwitch FC 4/FC 5

Foot Controller FC 7

USB-FDD Unit UD-FD01

CVP-409GP

(grand piano type)

CVP-409 CVP-407

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

219

Appendix

-For information on the panel controls, see “Panel

Controls” on page 12.

-For information on the jacks and connectors

located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using

Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 189.

-For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet

Terms” on page 188.

-For information on the parameters in the tab dis-

plays, refer to the tab names in this index.

Index

Symbols

.................................................................................65

√

.................................................................................65

Numerics

1–16 .................................................................. 148, 158

A-B Repeat ...................................................................41

...............................................................................108

AI FINGERED

.............................................................108

AI FULL KEYBOARD

..................................................108

Any key

......................................................................142

ARABIC

........................................................................85

Assembly

........................................................... 210, 213

ASSEMBLY (Style)

.......................................................122

Audio Recorder

............................................................60

Auto Accompaniment Feature

......................................44

AUTO REVOICE SETUP

...............................................91

Background (Lyrics) ......................................................55

Backup

.........................................................................76

BASIC

.........................................................................118

BASS

..........................................................................203

BOOKMARK

..............................................................180

Brightness

.....................................................................19

Browser

......................................................................184

Calibrating the iAFC settings .........................................83

Chain Playback

..........................................................138

CHANNEL

......................................................... 126, 158

CHANNEL ON/OFF

...................................................109

Characters

....................................................................73

CHORD

............................................................ 148, 158

CHORD DETECT

.......................................................204

CHORD FINGERING

.................................................107

Chord Tutor function

....................................................49

CMP

.............................................................................91

COMMON

.................................................................100

CONFIG 1

............................................31, 47, 109, 132

CONFIG 2

.....................................................17, 19, 204

Contrast

........................................................................18

CONTROLLER

............................................................100

Cool!

............................................................................78

COPY

...........................................................................70

CUT

.............................................................................71

Damper Pedal ..............................................................30

DELETE

........................................................................71

Demo

...........................................................................23

Demo (Voice)

...............................................................34

Direct Access

...............................................................64

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

...............................199

Drums

..........................................................................78

DSP

..............................................................................86

DSP/DSP VARIATION

..................................................86

DUAL

...........................................................................79

DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect

...........................................82

EDIT ...........................................................................121

Edit (Bookmarks)

........................................................ 182

Edit (Effect)

...................................................................93

Edit (EQ)

.......................................................................95

Edit (Lyrics)

.................................................................158

Edit (Master Compressor)

..............................................98

Edit (Music Finder)

..................................................... 114

Edit (OTS)

.....................................................................51

Edit (Song)

.................................................................. 158

Edit (Style)

..................................................................123

Edit (Vocal Harmony)

................................................. 167

Edit (Voice)

...................................................................99

EFFECT

.........................................................................90

Effect (microphone)

......................................................56

Effect (Voice)

................................................................ 86

Effect Return Level

........................................................94

Effect Type

................................................................... 92

EFFECT/EQ

................................................................. 102

Entering characters

....................................................... 73

Entering Characters (Internet Direct Connection)

........ 178

EQ (Equalizer)

..............................................................91

EQUAL TEMPERAMENT

.............................................. 85

ESEQ

.......................................................................... 199

EXIT

............................................................................. 67

F ...................................................................................65

Factory Reset

................................................................74

Factory-programmed Settings

.......................................74

FADE IN/OUT (Song)

................................................. 137

Fade In/Out time

........................................................137

FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME

........................................109

Fast forward

............................................................... 138

Favorite

...................................................................... 114

File

...............................................................................66

File Selection Display

............................................ 26, 68

File Selection Display Basic Operation

.........................67

File Selection Display Configuration

.............................66

File/Folder Operations

..................................................68

FILTER

................................................................. 90, 165

FINGERED

................................................................. 108

FINGERED ON BASS

................................................. 108

FOLDER

....................................................................... 72

Folder

...........................................................................66

Follow lights

...............................................................142

Foot Controller

............................................................. 30

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

220

Appendix

FOOTAGE ......................................................... 104, 105

Footage

......................................................................105

Footswitch

....................................................................30

Format

..........................................................................68

FREEZE

.......................................................................133

FULL KEYBOARD

.......................................................108

Function display

...........................................................27

GM System Level 1 ....................................................199

GM System Level 2

....................................................199

GROOVE

...................................................................124

..............................................................................199

Guide

.........................................................................141

Guide Lamp

.................................................................39

GUIDE LAMP ON/OFF

...............................................141

GUIDE LAMP TIMING

...............................................142

H ..................................................................................65

HARMONY

................................................................103

HARMONY/ECHO

.......................................................86

Headphone Hanger

......................................................17

Headphones

.................................................................17

Home Page

................................................................186

................................................................................84

iAFC .............................................................................82

ICON

...........................................................................72

Initialize

.......................................................................74

Initializing Internet Settings

........................................187

Internet Direct Connection

.........................................176

Internet Settings

..........................................................183

Karaoke ........................................................................54

Karao-key

...................................................................142

key cover

.....................................................................14

Keyboard Parts

.............................................................79

KEYBOARD/PANEL

............................................... 29, 58

KIRNBERGER

...............................................................85

LAN ...........................................................................184

LAN port

........................................................... 176, 196

Language

......................................................................18

Left

...............................................................................79

Left Pedal

.....................................................................30

Lid (CVP-409 grand piano type)

...................................16

Live!

.............................................................................78

Live!Drums

...................................................................78

Live!SFX

.......................................................................78

LYRICS

.......................................................................158

Lyrics

...........................................................................55

Main Display ......................................................... 25, 65

MAIN PICTURE

............................................................19

Master Compressor

.......................................................97

MASTER TUNE

.............................................................84

MEAN-TONE

............................................................... 85

MEDIA

........................................................68, 140, 195

Mega Voice

..................................................................78

MELODIC MINOR

.....................................................129

Messages

......................................................................63

microphone

..................................................................54

MICROPHONE SETTING

........................................... 170

MIDI

.......................................................................... 196

MIDI Settings

..............................................................200

MIDI Templates

..........................................................201

MIXING CONSOLE

......................................................88

MONO/POLY

.............................................................. 86

MULTI FINGER

..........................................................108

Multi track recording

..................................................143

Music Finder

................................................................52

Music Rest

....................................................................16

NAME ..........................................................................72

Natural!

........................................................................78

Notation

.......................................................................38

NW (Natural Wood)

.....................................................10

One Touch Setting ....................................................... 50

One-Handed Practice

...................................................39

Organ Flutes

...............................................................103

Organ Flutes!

............................................................... 78

Others

........................................................................ 185

OTS Link

...................................................................... 51

OTS Link Timing

........................................................110

OVERALL SETTING

....................................................171

OWNER

..........................................................18, 19, 20

Owner Name

...............................................................20

PANEL PART ................................................................ 89

PARAMETER

.............................................................. 127

Part

.............................................................................. 79

PASTE

................................................................... 70, 71

Pause

......................................................................... 138

PEDAL

........................................................................191

pedal polarity

............................................................. 191

pedals

.......................................................................... 30

percussion sounds

........................................................ 34

performance assistant technology

.................................43

Phrase Mark

...............................................................138

PHRASE MARK REPEAT

.............................................138

Pianist

........................................................................107

PIANO

.......................................................................100

Piano Lock

...................................................................29

Portamento

...................................................................86

Portamento Time

........................................................100

Practice Function

....................................................... 141

PRESET

.........................................................................26

Pro

.............................................................................107

PROPERTY

................................................................. 195

Prot. 1

..........................................................................70

Prot. 2 Edit

................................................................... 70

Prot. 2 Orig

..................................................................70

Punch In/Out Recording

.............................................159

PURE MAJOR

...............................................................85

PURE MINOR

.............................................................. 85

PYTHAGOREAN

.......................................................... 85

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

221

Appendix

-For information on the panel controls, see “Panel

Controls” on page 12.

-For information on the jacks and connectors

located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using

Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 189.

-For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet

Terms” on page 188.

-For information on the parameters in the tab dis-

plays, refer to the tab names in this index.

QUANTIZE ................................................................126

Quick Recording

........................................................143

QUICK START

............................................................139

RANDOM ..................................................................138

Realtime Recording

....................................................118

REC

..............................................................................65

REC MODE

................................................................158

RECEIVE

.....................................................................203

Record (Song)

...................................................... 42, 143

Record (Style)

.............................................................118

REGISTRATION MEMORY

.........................................131

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

......................................134

REPEAT MODE

................................................... 36, 138

Repeat Playback

.........................................................138

Repeat Playback Function

............................................41

Repertoire

....................................................................53

Revoice

........................................................................91

Rewind

.......................................................................138

[RGB OUT] Terminal

.................................................190

Right 1

.........................................................................79

Right 2

.........................................................................79

S. Articulation! .............................................................78

SAVE

............................................................................69

Save (Music Finder)

....................................................115

SCALE TUNE

................................................................84

Score

............................................................................38

Search (Music Finder Records)

....................................112

Section Set

.................................................................110

Session

.......................................................................107

Set the polarity of the pedal

........................................191

SFX

...............................................................................78

Sheet Music Braces

......................................................16

SINGLE FINGER

.........................................................108

SMF (Standard MIDI file)

............................................199

Song

.............................................................................35

SONG CH 1-8/9-16

.....................................................89

Song channels

............................................................147

Sostenuto Pedal

............................................................30

SOUND

.....................................................................101

Sound Creator

..............................................................99

sound effects

................................................................34

SPATIAL ENSEMBLE Effect

...........................................83

Speaker setting

.............................................................17

SPLIT

............................................................................79

SPLIT POINT

..............................................................111

Step Recording

.................................................. 118, 143

Stop ACMP

.................................................................110

Style

.............................................................................44

Style Assembly

...........................................................118

Style Change Behavior

...............................................110

Style Creator

...............................................................117

Style File

....................................................................199

STYLE PART

.................................................................89

Style parts

...................................................................147

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

....................................109

Style Structure

............................................................117

Style Touch

................................................................110

Sweet!

.......................................................................... 78

Synchro Start (Song)

................................................... 137

Synchro Start (Style)

......................................................47

Synchro Stop

................................................................ 48

Synchro Stop Window

................................................110

Synthetic ivory keytops

.................................................10

SYS/EX.

.......................................................................158

SYSTEM

......................................................................202

SYSTEM RESET

............................................................. 75

TALK ............................................................................ 59

TALK SETTING

...........................................................174

Tap function

...............................................................137

Text

..............................................................................55

Threshold

..................................................................... 98

Top

............................................................................ 138

TRANSMIT

................................................................. 202

Transpose

........................................................56, 58, 84

TUNE

........................................................................... 90

UP ................................................................................67

USB Audio Recorder

....................................................60

[USB TO DEVICE] Terminal

.......................................195

USER

............................................................................26

Vibrato ....................................................................... 102

VIDEO OUT

.................................................................56

Vocal CueTIME

..........................................................142

VOCAL HARMONY EDIT

................................. 168, 169

VOCAL HARMONY TYPE

..........................................167

Voice

..............................................................28, 32, 78

VOICE EFFECT

.............................................................86

Voice Program Change Number

.................................204

VOICE SET

...................................................................99

VOL/ATTACK

.............................................................105

VOL/VOICE

..................................................................90

WERCKMEISTER .......................................................... 85

Wireless Game Adaptor

.................................... 176, 188

Wireless LAN

.............................................................185

XF .............................................................................. 199

............................................................................. 199

Appendix

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

222

Panel Button Chart

The position of the button on the panel can be conﬁrmed by the Panel Control (page 12).

Symbol

[–] [+] (TEMPO) ............................................................. 8

[–] [+] (TRANSPOSE) ..................................................... 6

Number

[1]–[4] (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ................................... n

[1]–[8] (REGISTRATION MEMORY)............................... k

π†

]–[8

π†

] ................................................................... O

[ACMP ON/OFF] ........................................................... 0

[AUTO FILL IN] ............................................................. A

[A]–[J]............................................................................ K

[BREAK]................................................................................. D

[CHANNEL ON/OFF].......................................................... N

Damper pedal....................................................................... s

[DATA ENTRY]..................................................................... R

[DEMO]......................................................................... 4

[DIRECT ACCESS]................................................................ L

Drum Kit icons ..................................................................... p

[DUAL (RIGHT2)] ................................................................ V

ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III]........................................................ E

[ENTER]................................................................................. S

[EXIT]..................................................................................... Q

[EXTRA TRACKS] ................................................................. a

[FUNCTION]........................................................................ X

[GUIDE] ................................................................................ f

[INTERNET] .......................................................................... Y

INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] ................................................................. B

Keyboard guide lamps......................................................... t

[LCD CONTRAST] ............................................................... J

Left pedal .............................................................................. q

[LYRICS/TEXT] button.......................................................... e

MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] ..................................... C

[MASTER VOLUME]............................................................. 3

[MEMORY]............................................................................ j

Mic signal/over lamps.................................................... u

[MIXING CONSOLE] ........................................................... M

[MUSIC FINDER].................................................................. I

[ON/OFF] (METRONOME) ............................................ 5

[OTS LINK]............................................................................ o

[PIANO RESET] ..................................................................... h

[PLAY/PAUSE]....................................................................... ]

[POWER] ............................................................................... 1

[REC] ...................................................................................... [

REGIST BANK [+] [–] ........................................................... i

[REPEAT]................................................................................ g

[REW]/[FF] buttons ............................................................... ^

[SCORE]................................................................................. d

[SONG SELECT].................................................................... Z

Sostenuto pedal..................................................................... r

[SPLIT (LEFT)] ........................................................................ W

[START/STOP] ............................................................... H

[STOP] ................................................................................... \

STYLE category selection buttons................................... 9

[SYNC START] ...................................................................... G

[SYNC STOP] ........................................................................ F

TAB [

√

][

] ........................................................................... P

[TAP TEMPO] (TEMPO) ................................................. 7

[TRACK 1 (R)]........................................................................ c

[TRACK 2 (L)] ........................................................................ b

[USB]...................................................................................... T

[USB TO DEVICE] ......................................................... 2

[USER]........................................................................... U

VOICE category selection buttons.................................. l

[VOICE EFFECT] ................................................................... m

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

223

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for ﬁfty

seven (57) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument:

Alﬁe

Theme from the Paramount Picture ALFIE

Words by Hal David

Music by Burt Bacharach

All Shook Up

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

Beauty And The Beast

from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST

Lyrics by Howard Ashman

Music by Alan Menken

pany, Inc.

Bésame Mucho (Kiss Me Much)

Music and Spanish Words by Consuelo Velazquez

English Words by Sunny Skylar

S.A.

Copyrights Renewed

All Rights Administered by Peer International Corporation

Blue Hawaii

from the Paramount Picture WAIKIKI WEDDING

Words and Music by Leo Robin and Ralph Rainger

Corporation

Blue Moon

Words by Lorenz Hart

Music by Richard Rodgers

All Rights Controlled by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. (Publishing)

and WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print)

Brazil

Words and Music by Ray Barroso

English lyrics by S. K. Russell

California Girls

Words and Music by Brian Wilson and Mike Love

Can You Feel The Love Tonight

from Walt Disney Pictures’ THE LION KING

Music by Elton John

Lyrics by Tim Rice

Can’t Help Falling In Love

from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII

Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Cre-

atore

All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company,

Inc. and Chrysalis Music

Chim Chim Cher-ee

from Walt Disney’s MARY POPPINS

Words and Music by Richard M. Sherman and Robert B. Sherman

Do-Re-Mi

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

Don’t Be Cruel (To A Heart That’s True)

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley

Music, Inc.

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

Edelweiss

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

Fly Me To The Moon (In Other Words)

featured in the Motion Picture ONCE AROUND

Words and Music by Bart Howard

Corp., New York, NY

International Copyright Secured

Used by Permission

Hey Jude

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Hound Dog

Words and Music by Jerry Leiber and Mike Stoller

Co., Inc.

Music Publishing, A Division of Universal Studios, Inc.

All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company,

Inc. and Chrysalis Music

I Just Called To Say I Love You

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

I Left My Heart In San Francisco

Words by Douglass Cross

Music by George Cory

mission

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

224

In The Mood

By Joe Garland

Used by Permission

Isn’t She Lovely

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

Let It Be

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Let’s Twist Again

Words by Kal Mann

Music by Dave Appell and Kal Mann

All Rights Controlled and Administered by Spirit Two Music, Inc.

(ASCAP)

Linus And Lucy

By Vince Guaraldi

Love Story

Theme from the Paramount Picture LOVE STORY

Music by Francis Lai

Corporation

Lullaby Of Birdland

Words by George David Weiss

Music by George Shearing

mission

Michelle

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Mickey Mouse March

from Walt Disney’s THE MICKEY MOUSE CLUB

Words and Music by Jimmie Dodd

Mission: Impossible Theme

from the Paramount Television Series MISSION: IMPOSSIBLE

By Lalo Schifrin

pany

Mona Lisa

from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.

Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans

Moon River

from the Paramount Picture BREAKFAST AT TIFFANY’S

Words by Johnny Mercer

Music by Henry Mancini

Moonlight Serenade

Words by Mitchell Parish

Music by Glen Miller

TION

All Rights Controlled and Administered by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG

INC.

My Favorite Things

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

My Way

By Paul Anka, Jacques Revaux, Claude Francois and Giles Thibault

The Nearness Of You

from the Paramount Picture ROMANCE IN THE DARK

Words by Ned Washington

Music by Hoagy Carmichael

Corporation

Theme From “New York, New York”

Music by John Kander

Words by Fred Ebb

All Rights Controlled by EMI UNART CATALOG INC. (Publishing) and

WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print)

Ob-La-Di, Ob-La-Da

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Proud Mary

Words and Music by J.C. Fogerty

Return To Sender

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Winﬁeld Scott

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

The Shoop Shoop Song (It’s In His Kiss)

Words and Music by Rudy Clark

Charts

All Rights for the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio

Music Company, Inc.

All Rights for the World excluding the United States Controlled and

Administered by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Alley Music Corp.

Used by Permission

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

225

(Sittin’ On) The Dock Of The Bay

Words and Music by Steve Cropper and Otis Redding

Smoke Gets In Your Eyes

from ROBERTA

Words by Otto Harbach

Music by Jerome Kern

INC.

International Rights Secured. Not for broadcast transmission.

DO NOT DUPLICATE. NOT FOR RENTAL.

WARNING: It is a violation of Federal Copyright Law to synchronize

this Multimedia Disc with video tape or ﬁlm, or to print the Composi-

tion(s) embodied on this Multimedia Disc in the form of standard

music notation, without the express written permission of the copy-

right owner.

Somewhere, My Love

Lara’s Theme from DOCTOR ZHIVAGO

Lyric by Paul Francis Webster

Music by Maurice Jarre

and EMI Robbins Catalog Inc.

Spanish Eyes

Words by Charles Singleton and Eddie Snyder

Music by Bert Kaempfert

KAEMPFERT

All Rights for the world, excluding Germany, Austria and Switzerland,

Controlled and Administered by SCREEN GEMS-EMI MUSIC INC.

mission

Speak Softly, Love (Love Theme)

from the Paramount Picture THE GODFATHER

Words by Larry Kusik

Music by Nino Rota

Stella By Starlight

from the Paramount Picture THE UNINVITED

Words by Ned Washington

Music by Victor Young

tion

Take The “A” Train

Words and Music by Billy Strayhorn

Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. (ASCAP) for the U.S.A.

Rights for DreamWorks Songs and Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. Adminis-

tered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc.

Tears In Heaven

Words and Music by Eric Clapton and Will Jennings

All Rights for E.C. Music Ltd. Administered by Unichappell Music Inc.

All Rights for Blue Sky Rider Songs Administered by Irving Music, Inc.

That Old Black Magic

from the Paramount Picture STAR SPANGLED RHYTHM

Words by Johnny Mercer

Music by Harold Arlen

That’s Amore (That’s Love)

from the Paramount Picture THE CADDY

Words by Jack Brooks

Music by Harry Warren

and Four Jays Music

Up Where We Belong

from the Paramount Picture AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN

Words by Will Jennings

Music by Buffy Sainte-Marie and Jack Nitzsche

Corporation

Waltz For Debby

Lyric by Gene Lees

Music by Bill Evans

(Renewed) Folkways Music Publishers, Inc., New York, NY

International Copyright Secured

Used by Permission

White Christmas

from the Motion Picture Irving Berlin’s HOLIDAY INN

Words and Music by Irving Berlin

A Whole New World

from Walt Disney’s ALADDIN

Music by Alan Menken

Lyrics by Tim Rice

Company

Yesterday

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

You Are The Sunshine Of My Life

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

MUSIC

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

You Sexy Thing

Words and Music by E. Brown

Administered in the USA and Canada by Music & Media International,

Inc.

Administered for the World excluding the USA and Canada by RAK

Music Publishing Ltd.

CVP-409/407 Owner’s Manual

226

MEMO

The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the

apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table

speciﬁed by the manufacturer,

or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has

been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate

normally, or has been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CVP-409GP (grand piano type)

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,

spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids

are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may

exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are

designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure

that benches are stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applica-

ble) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by

Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recom-

mended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

CVP-409/407

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

This product contains a high intensity lamp that con-

tains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this

material may be regulated due to environmental

considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer

to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano

Model Name : CVP-409/407

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Piano

Model Name : CVP-409GP

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

CVP-409/407

CVP-409GP (grand piano type)

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and

electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points,

in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential

negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste

handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality,

your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further

information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local

authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Ice-

land

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB46

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WH89980 612APZC?.?-01B0

Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha CVP-409PE El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-409PE

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Descargar PDF

informe

en otros idiomas

français: Yamaha CVP-409PE Le manuel du propriétaire
italiano: Yamaha CVP-409PE Manuale del proprietario
English: Yamaha CVP-409PE Owner's manual
Deutsch: Yamaha CVP-409PE Bedienungsanleitung
русский: Yamaha CVP-409PE Инструкция по применению
Nederlands: Yamaha CVP-409PE de handleiding
português: Yamaha CVP-409PE Manual do proprietário
dansk: Yamaha CVP-409PE Brugervejledning
polski: Yamaha CVP-409PE Instrukcja obsługi
čeština: Yamaha CVP-409PE Návod k obsluze
svenska: Yamaha CVP-409PE Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha CVP-409PE El kitabı
suomi: Yamaha CVP-409PE Omistajan opas
română: Yamaha CVP-409PE Manualul proprietarului

Yamaha CVP-409PE El manual del propietario

Yamaha CVP-409PE El manual del propietario

en otros idiomas

Artículos relacionados

Otros documentos